Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 302

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

FAPT Ladder for PC

Operators Manual

B-66131EN/05 Japan 1995


Warnings and notices for GFLE-003

this publication

Warning
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various
matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,
or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this
manual should be regarded as “impossible”.

Notice
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have
been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or
variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with
installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in
all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to
holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with


respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of
the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall
apply.

The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

CIMPLICITY® Genius®

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

Alarm Master PROMACRO


CIMSTAR Series Five
Field Control Series 90
Genet Series One
Helpmate Series Six
LogicMaster Series Three
Modelmaster VuMaster
PowerMotion Workmaster
ProLoop

© Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd.


Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.

All Rights Reserved


No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS

I. BASICS (NORMAL OPERATIONS)

1. OVERVIEW ...................................................... l-1

2. INSTALLATION ................................................... 1-5


2.1 Operating Environment .......................................... 1- 6
2.1.1 PC9801 operating environment ............... ._f ............. 1- 7
2.1.2 IBM PC/AT operating environment ........................... l-10
2.2 Installation Procedure .......................................... l-11

3. ACTIVATION .................................................... l-15

4. BASICOPERATION ....................... ..q ..................... l-17

4.1 Menu Configuration ........................................... l-17


4.2 Common System Operations ..................................... l-19

4.3 Model Setting ................................................ l-21

5. OPERATION .................................................... l-22

5.1 Editing ..................................................... l-22

5.1 .l Title data editing ........................................ l-25

5.1.2 Ladder diagram editing ................................... l-26

5.1.3 Symbol and comment editing ............................... l-60


5.1.4 Message editing ........................................ l-68

5.1.5 I’0 module editing ....................................... l-70


5.1.6 System parameter editing ................................. l-73

5.2 Printout .................................................... l-85

5.3 Compilation ................................................. 1 - 94

5.3.1 Operation ............................................. l-95


5.3.2 Password set function
(PMCRAlRA3/RB3/RB4’RB5/RB6/RC3!RC4/NB!NB2) ............. l-99
5.3.3 Changing the Order of Subprograms ......................... 1 - 103

5.3.4 It is possible to choose output data


(Symbol/Comment. Net comment) to ROM format file ............. l-103
5.3.5 The list of source program ................................ l-105
5.3.6 DOS command ........................................ l-109
5.4 Decompilation .............................................. l-110
5.4.1 Operation ............................................ l-110

5.4.2 Outputting to split files ................................... l-112


5.4.3 Converting a step sequence program according to the model ....... 1-113
5.4.4 Merge .............................................. 1-113
5.5 Link ...................................................... l-116
5.6 InputiOutput. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-119
5.6.1 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
5.6.2 Transfer to and from PMC-L/M (FANUC Series 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-124
5.6.3 Transfer to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A’B.‘C.!E) . . 1-128
5.6.4 Transfer to and from PMC-N!NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL A,
-MODELB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l- 131
56.5 input/Output for PMC-QA (FANUC SYSTEM F-MODEL D Mate) . . . . . 1-134
5.6.6 Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB!QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-140
5.6.7 Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card . . . 1-142
5.6.8 Handy File + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format) ................. 1-147
5.6.9 FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER + 3.5” floppy disk (P-G format) . . . . . 1-149
5.7 Mnemonic Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-150
5.7.1 Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-150
5.7.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-152
5.7.3 Mnemonic file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153
5.7.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format) . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157
5.7.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-166
5.7.6 The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a model l-170
5.7.7 User batch file execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171

II. APPLICATIONS (NOTES ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC’AT .................. 2-l
1.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC .................. 2-l
1.l.l Command input during startup ............................... 2-l
1.1.2 Communications settings ................................... 2-2
1.1.3 Protocol ............................................... 2-4
1.1.4 BUSY control ........................................... 2-4
1.1.5 Data start and end codes ................................... 2-5
1.1.6 Data conversion (return codes) ............................... 2-5
1.1.7 Transmission and receive data ............................... 2-5
1.1.8 Error detection and messages ............................... 2-6
1.1.9 Error detection and handling ................................. 2-7
1.2 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program .......................... 2-8
1.2.1 Converting by system parameter editing ........................ 2-8
1.2.2 Convert with signal address converter .......................... 2-9
1.2.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program ............ 2-11
1.3 Standard Symbol Data ......................................... 2-11
1.4 Changing Printer Output Format ................................... 2-12
1.4.1 Changing the paper selection name .......................... 2-14
1.4.2 Setting the top margin .................................... 2-14
1.4.3 Setting the spacing between the LADDER net ................... 2-14
1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper ....................... 2-15
1.4.5 Setting the line spacing ................................... 2-16
1.4.6 Settingthe left margin .................................... 2-16
1.4.7 Setting the title of printout ................................. 2-19
1.4.8 Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information .... 2 - 19
1.4.9 Setting the cross-reference list output information ................ 2 - 20
1.4.10 Specifying the cross-reference list output format ................. 2 - 20
1.4.11 Setting the cross-reference list readiwrite coil guidance information .... 2-21

1.4.12 Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed ..................... 2-21


1.4.13 Specifying the cross-reference list page break ................... 2 - 21
1.4.14 Setting the output format guidance ........................... 2 - 22
1.4.15 Setting the output information ............................... 2-22

1.4.16 Setting the output format .................................. 2-22


1.4.17 Setting the read/write coil guidance ........................... 2 - 23
1.4.18 Setting line feed ........................................ 2-23
1.4.19 Setting form feed ....................................... 2-23

III.THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

1. OVERVIEW ...................................................... 3-l

1.1 WhatisaStepSequence? ....................................... 3-l

1.2 Programming with the Step Sequence Method ......................... 3- 1

1.3 A Program Configuration Screen ................................... 3- 1

1.4 The Configration of a Sequence Program ............................. 3- 2

1.5 DataFlow ................................................... 3-3

2. SETTING A MODEL ................................................ 3-4

2.1 Operation .................................................... 3-4

3. EDITING ........................................................ 3-6

3.1 Basic Operation ............................................... 3- 6


3.2 Creating a Step Sequence ....................................... 3- 9

3.2.1 Creating a subprogram of the step sequence ..................... 3- 9

3.2.2 Creating a step sequence program ........................... 3 - 10


APPENDIX

APPENDIX 1 DATA TRANSFER CABLES .................................. Al - 1


APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM ............ A2 - 1
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES ...................................... A3 - 1
APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY) ............ A4 - 1
APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20) ......... A5 - 1
APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMC-RAl!RA3, NB, AND QC) A6 - 1
APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S ............................. A7- 1
APPENDIX 8 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) ............... A8 - 1
APPENDIX 9 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE ................................ A9 - 1
APPENDIX lOMANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM .......................... AlO- 1
APPENDIX 11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%?‘oFLSET.CNF.‘. ............. Al 1 - 1
APPENDIX 12 INQUIRY FORM ......................................... A12- 1
I. BASICS
(NORMAL OPERATIONS)
1. OVERVIEW

1. OVERVIEW

This manual describes the software products listed below which are included in the FAPT LADDER
offline programming system for FANUC PMC sequence program generation. These software
products are designed to run on standard personal computers.

Personal
Name Specification Remarks
computer

JEC PC9801 FAPT LADDER PMC-L/M/P A08B-9200-J500#JP For the NEC PC9801
FAPT LADDER PMC-N A08B-9200-J501 #JP Series and compatible
FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/‘RC A08B-9200-J502#JP machines (Japanese
language version)

BM PC/AT FAPT LADDER PMC-UM/P A08B-9201 -JSOO#EN For IBM PC/AT and
FAPT LADDER PMC-N A08B-9201-J501#EN compatible machines
FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC A08B-9201-J502#EN (English language version)

This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operate the software above that
are specific to the system designed for use with personal computers. For PMC operations and
how to create PMC sequence programs, refer to the manuals listed below.

FANUC PMC-MODEL K/UM!P


Programming Manual (LADDER language) B-551 93E

FANUC PMC-MODEL N
Programming Manual (LADDER language) B-61013E

FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1 :PA3:RAl ‘RA2!RA3/RB’RB2!RB3iRB4!RBS’RBG;RC!RC3’RC4!NB’NB2

Programming Manual (LADDER language) B-61 863E

Inquiry form
If you have any questions after reading this operator’s manual and the manuals listed above,
use the inquiry form attached at Appendix 12 to consult us the questions.

l-l
1. OVERVIEW

The following abbreviations are used in this manual for PMC models.

Abbreviations PMC Models

PMC-UM!P
* PMC-L FANUC PMC-MODEL L
* PMC-M FANUC PMC-MODEL M
* PMC-P FANUC PMC-MODEL P

Pfk-N FANUC PMC-MODEL N

PMC-R Series
* PMC-RAl _ * FANUC PMC-MODEL RAl
* PMC-RA2 .- FANUC PMC-MODEL RA2
* PMC-RA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3
- PMC-RB FANUC PMC-MODEL RB
- PMCRB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB2
* PMC-RB3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB3
- PMC-RB4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4
- PMC-RB5 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5
* PMC-RB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6
. PMC-RC FANUC PMC-MODEL RC
* PMGRC3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3
* PMCRC4 FANUC PM&MODEL RC4

PMC-PA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1

PMC-PA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL PA3

PMC-QA FANUC PMC-MODEL QA

PMC-QC FANUC PMC-MODEL QC

PMC-NA FANUC PMC-MODEL NA

PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB

PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2

1-2
1. OVERVIEW

The major functions of the software are listed below.

(1) Sequence program input. display, and editing


(2) Transmission to and from PMC (RAM), and PMC verification
(3) ROM (EPROM, ROM cassette, and ROM modules) write, read, and verification
(4) Sequence program print-out

. . . . . . . . . . .,................................ > (-NC


Machine Tool

RS232C PMC DVDO


RS232C 3

FLOPPY
CASSETTE
/Handy File

Input/Edit
Personal computer sequence
Floppy disk program
NEC PC9801
IBM PC/AT

Memory Memory card


card c=e interface

Drawing

1-3
1. OVERVIEW

Operation flow for FAPT LADDER activation Reference chapter/section

Prepare personal computer. MS-DOS, and FAPT LADDER

+
Install MS-DOS

4
Create directory for FAPT LADDER

1 Section 2.2
Install FAPT LADDER

+
Install device drivers
- Section 2.1
@et CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXECBAT)

J.
Reset personal computer

- Section 5.6

Activate FAPT LADDER - Chapter 3

Set model (PMC) - Section 4.3

Operations includinq editing - Chapter 5

J/
End?
Yes
JI
Terminate FAPT LADDER

l-4
2. INSTALLATION

2. INSTALLATION

FAPT LADDER software is stored on the floppy disks listed below. Before the system can be
used, the contents of these system floppy disks must be written to a hard disk; the software cannot
be run directly from the floppy disks. To install the system on a hard disk, the user needs to be
familiar with the hardware and software of his or her personal computer, particularly with basic MS-
DOS command operation and files such as CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT.

The names of the floppy disks are listed below.

FAPT LADDER PMC-L;M:P system floppy disk A08B-9200-J500 #JP (PC9801)


Vols.1 and 2 A08B-9201 -J500 #EN (IBM PC/AT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-L”module floppy disk A08B-9200-J600 #JP (PC9801)


A08B-9201-J600 #EN (IBM PCAT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-M module floppy disk A08B-9200-J601 #JP (PC9801)


A08B-9201-J601 #EN (IBM PC/AT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk A08B-9200-J602 #JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201-J602 #EN (IBM PC’AT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-N’NAQA system floppy disk A08B-9200-J501 #JP (PC9801)


Vols.1, 2, and 3 A08B-9201-J501 #EN (IBM PC’AT)

FAPT LADDER PMCRAlIRA2IRA3:RBiRB2/RB3/RB4/RC A08B-9200-J502 #JP (PC9801)


/RC3/RC4/PAl !PAYQCNB system floppy disk A08B-9201 -J502 #EN (IBM PC/AT)
Vols. 1, 2, and 3

FAPT LADDER PMC-RAl IRA2iRA3;PAl iPA module A08B-9200-J603 #JP (PC9801)


floppy disk A08B-9201 -J603 #EN (IBM PC’AT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-RB1RB2’RB3.‘RB4’RC’RC3.1RC4 A08B-9200-J604 #JP (PC9801)


module floppy disk A08B-9201-J604 #EN (IBM PC’AT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-QC module floppy disk A08B-9200-J605#JP (PC9801)


A08B-9201 -J605#EN (IBM PCAT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-NB module floppy disk A08B-9200-J606#JP (PC9801)


A08B-9201-J606#EN (IBM PC AT)

l-5
2. INSTALLATION

PMC model Combination PMC model Combination

PMC-L 0.8 PMC-RAl 0, QJ

PMC-M @, @ PMC-RA2 @, @

PMC-M (with MMC) 0. @I PMC-RA3 @. QJ

PMC-P 0 PMC-RB @, @

PMC-N @ PMC-RB2 @, @

PMC-PA1 @, @ PMC-RB3 @, @

PMC-PA3 0, ZJ PMC-RC 0, @

PMC-QA @ PMC-RC3 0, @

PMC-QC 43, @ PMC-RC4 8, @

?MC-NA 6J

‘MC-NB 0, @

2.1 Operating Environment

To use the software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied. Before
installing the software, check these requirements.

NEC PC9801 IBM PC/AT

Main memory Free area of 500K bytes or more is required (Note 1) (Note 2).

Hard disk About 3M bytes is required for installing the system (Note 3).

OS MS-DOS Version 3.1 or later PC-DOS Version 3.3 or later

Printer NEC PR20lH EPSON VP1 000


Epson VP1000 (Note 4)

EMS A LIM type EMS (expanded memory specification) memory board may be
required depending on the PMC model and the size of a sequence program
to be created. For details, see 2.1.1.

Others The EGA graphic interface is


required.

(Note 1) If the standard memory size of the machine is insufficient, memory expansion is
required.
(Note 2) Even if the machine has 640K-byte memory, the memory may not be large enough
when an installed driver. for example, uses a large memory space. The size of free
space in main memory can be checked with the MS-DOS command CHKDSK.

l-6
2. INSTALLATION

(Note 3) In addition, an area for storing sequence program data is required.


(Note 4) To use the Epson VP1000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification is required.
For details, see Section 1.2 in Part II.

2.1.1 PC9801 operating environment

(1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT

When starting MS-DOS, the user needs to install the following device drivers:

l RSDRV.SYS
l PRINT.SYS

Add the lines indicated below to CONFIG.SYS.


RSDRV.SYS and PRINT.SYS are assumed to be under the directory named gSDEV on drive A.

DEVICE=A:$(DEVyRSDRV.SYS
DEVICE=A:yDEV'1CPRINT,SYS

(Note) When you are using a memory card adapter, set CONFIG.SYS referring to the
operator’s manual for the memory card adapter.

(2) Using the expanded memory

The expanded memory specification (EMSXMS) memory can be used with the system as a
work area for a sequence program. EMSXMS memory allows a larger sequence program to
be used. (An EMS memory size of 256K bytes or more allows 24000 or more steps to be
edited.)
If EMSXMS memory is not used, a sequence program of up to about 21840 steps can be
handled when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.
Ladder diagram editing cannot output drawings if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot
be allocated in main memory due to the space taken up by resident device drivers. In this
case, EMS memory is required.

FANUC has confirmed that the setting described below ensures normal operation.

MS-DOS Version 3.38 (for the PC-9801 Series)


Machine with a 80386:80386SX CPU

Specify the statement below as the first DEVICE statement of the CONFIG.SYS file. Each
device driver is assumed to be under the directory named DEV on drive A.

(Note) When an EMS board and EMS device driver are used, change the CONFIGSYS file
according to the manufacture’s manual.

l-7
2. INSTALLATION

Expanded memory (EMS) EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more


Extended memory (XMS) (recommended) (Kate 1)
* Better to include EMS of 256 kbyte
or more (Note 2)

Note 1) The quantity of the EMS and XMS memory effects on the performance to handle
Symbol data and Net comment. Please prepare enough EMS or XMS memory
specially for Symbol data or Net comment of large number.
Note 2) At the system with EMS less than 256 kbytes, the maximum number of steps which
FAPT LADDER can handle may be restricted. Please prepare 256 kbytes or more
EMS if possible.

About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:

Although FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS nor XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory
according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance.

1) EMS memory for Ladder sequence program

FAPT LADDER uses EMS memory for Ladder sequence program if available.
When no EMS memory is found, the convenGonal memory is used, and the size of
conventional memory may restrict the number of steps able to be edited.
Ladder sequence program occupies 256 kbyte of EMS, regardless of the type of PMC, or
the size of the ladder sequence program to edit.

2) EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data

FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data if available.
When neither of them are available, FAPT LADDER will make temporary file on the hard
drive, and processing large number of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.
About 200 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Symbol data.

3) EMS and XMS memory for Net comment

For Net comment, FAPT LADDER also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, or temporary file
as same as Symbol & Comment data.
About 200 to 300 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Net comments.

(3) Using a Japanese language input FEP

FAPT LADDER for PC9801 allows comments in Japanese to be entered on the symbol and
comment editing screen. (See Section 51.3.)
For Japanese language input, a front-end processor (FEP) for Japanese language input is
required. For information about the installation and operation of an FEP, see the relevant
manual.

1-8
2. INSTALLATION

The following Japanese language input FEPs can be used:

Supplier Driver name Memory size required Remarks

NEC NECAlKl. DRV About 130K bytes Al step-by-step conversion


NECAIK2. DRV Al multiple-block conversion
Step-by-step conversion
Multiple-block conversion

NECDIC. DRV About 40K bytes Single-block conversion

Just Systems ATOKGA. SYS About 100K bytes ATOKG


ATOKGB. SYS

ATOK7A. SYS About 115K bytes ATOK

1
ATOK7B. SYS When the EMS is used
Main : 50K bytes
EMS : 64K bytes

Note the following points on Japanese language input:

(a) When a Japanese language input FEP is activated (in the Japanese language input mode),
the Japanese language input FEP displays data on a section of the screen. As a result, the
FAPT LADDER screen may temporarily be in disarray. However, the FAPT LADDER
screen returns to normal when Japanese language input is completed (Japanese language
input mode is terminated).

(W When a comment is entered using only Japanese, up to 14 characters can be entered.

(c) A comment entered in Japanese can be displayed on the editing screen or printed out, but
cannot be written into a ROM cassette or transferred to the PMC. At compile time, a
message is output indicating this restriction and all Japanese characters are converted to
blanks. Note, however, that sequence program operation is not affected.

60 A Japanese language input FEP is installed as a resident driver in the system. This means
that memory available to FAPT LADDER is reduced accordingly. Check that the size of
memory usable for FAPT LADDER is 500K bytes or more to allow FAPT LADDER
execution.
Editing alone can be performed without installing PRINT.SYS and RSDRV.SYS in order to
allocate a free area of 500K bytes. Note that when FILES or BUFFERS is specified in
CONFIG.SYS. a main memory size of 1K bytes is used per file (buffer) specified. Make
adjustments as required.

09 A Japanese language input FEP can also be installed with ADDDRV and DELDRV by using
a subprocess after calling COMMAND.COM in user batch execution.

An example is provided below.

l-9
2. INSTALLATION

First. change the contents of FLMNE.BAT under the directory where FAPT LADDER is
insta”ed, as follows:

FLMNE. BAT
r
!COMMAND

Inaddition, create a file with the name FEP.DEF with the definitions below. The example
below assumes use of ATOK7. For detailed information, see the manual of the relevant
FEP.

FEP.DEF
DEVICE=A:YDEV+ATOK7A.SYS/D=A:+ATOK7L.DIC
DEVICE=A:YDEV)CATOK7B.SYS
>
Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu, and select F3 (user batch file
execution). The following message appears:

Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'.
Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Enter N to return to MS-DOS. Execute the following commands to install and remove the
FEP:

ADDDRV FEP.DEF (To install the FEP)

DELDRV 1 (To remove the FEP)

The user can return to FAPT LADDER by pressing Fi .

2.1.2 IBM PC/AT operating environment

(1) CONFIGSYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT

The system uses ANSI-based escape sequences. Therefore, ANSI.SYS needs to be installed
using CONFIG.SYS.

Add the line indicated below to CONFIG.SYS.


ANSI.SYS is assumed to be under directory \DEV on drive A.

DEVICE=A:\DEV\ANSI.SYS

l-10
2. INSTALLATION

(2) Using EMS

The expanded memory specification (EMS) memory can be used with the system as a work
area for a sequence program. The EMS memory allows a larger sequence program to be
used. (An EMS memory size of 256K bytes or more allows 24000 steps to be edited.)
If EMS memory is not used, a sequence program of up to about 21840 steps can be handled
when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.)
Ladder diagram editing cannot be started if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot be
allocated in main memory due to the space taken up by resident device drivers. In this case,
EMS memory is required.

FANUC has confirmed that the setting described below ensures normal operation.

MS-DOS Version 4.0

Specify the statements below as the first DEVICE statements of the CONFIG.SYS file. Each
device driver is assumed to be under directory \DEV on drive A.

DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMAEM.SYS
DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMA2EMS.SYS FRAME=COOO

2.2 Installation Procedure

An installation batch file is used to install the programs on the system and module floppy disks.
(See (3))
Note that there are two different installation procedures. They are selected according to the type
and edition of the system.

0 Installation of ordinary files (see item (1) for the procedure.)


The programs on the following system and module floppy disks are distributed in ordinary
file format.

- PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500) editions 06.1 and earlier


. PMC-N system floppy disk (A08B-920019201 -JSOl)
. PMC-RB!RC system floppy disk (A08B-9200/9201 -J502) editions 07.1 and earlier
* All module floppy disks

@ Installation of compressed files (see item (2) for the procedure.)


The programs on the following system and floppy disks are distributed in compressed file
format.

* PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500) editions 06.2 and earlier


* PMC-RBRC system floppy disk (AO8B-9200/9201-J502) editions 08.0 and earlier

Note 1) The installation procedure of the programs on each floppy disk is subject to change.
Before starting installation, refer to a README.DOC file (if there is one). If there is no
README.DOC, use the ordinary file format installation procedure (1).

1-11
2. INSTALLATION

Note 2) The compressed file is a self-extracting file produced using an archive program utility
named LHA. LHA is freeware created by Mr. Haruyasu Yoshizaki.

(1) Installation procedure for ordinary files on system floppy disks

The following procedure uses an example in which ordinary files are read from each PMC-N
system floppy disk in drive B:, and installed in the directory Y FLADDER created on the hard
disk drive (C:).

[Operation]
Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.

Enter the following commands to execute an installation batch file.

B:Y> CD INSTALL
B:YINSTALL> INSTALL B:Y C:+FLADDER

0 When the following message appears, confirm it, and press any key.

SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to C:\ FLADDER


(HARD DISK)
SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\
When stop "CTRL+C"
Press any key to continue

If it is necessary to discontinue installation, press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution of the
batch file.

VOLI is installed on the hard disk.

When the following message appears, insert the system floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and
press any key.

SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.21 on DRIVE B:\


When stop "CTRLtC"
Press any key to continue

VOL2 is installed on the hard disk.

When the following message appears, insert the system floppy disk VOL3 in a drive, and
press any key.

SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.31 on DRIVE B:\


When stop "CTRLtC"
Press any key to continue

VOL3 is installed on the hard disk.

1-12
2. INSTALLATION

9 The following message appears.

(2) Installation procedure for compressed files on system floppy disks

The following procedure uses an example in which ordinary files are read from each PMC-
RB.‘RC system floppy disk in drive B:, and installed in the directory Y FLADDER created on the
hard disk drive (A:).

[Procedure ]
Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.

Enter the following commands to execute an installation batch file.

I B:Y> CD INSTALL
B:YINSTALL> INSTALL 9: A:YFLADDERY I

Note 1) When specifying the files to be installed, enter only their drive name; do not specify a
directory (that is, do not enter 4h).

Note 2) When specifying the directory in which the system is to be installed, suffix it with Y .

When the following message appears, confirm it. and press any key.

SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to A:\ FLADDER


(HARD DISK)
SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\
When stop "CTRL+C"
Press any key to continue

If it is necessary to discontinue installation, press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution of the
batch file.

VOLl is installed on the hard disk.

When the following message appears, insert the system floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and
press any key.

SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.21 on DRIVE B:\


When stop "CTRLtC"
Press any key to continue

VOL2 is installed on the hard disk.

1-13
2. INSTALLATION

When the following message appears. insert the system floppy disk VOL3 in a drive, and
press any key.

SET [SYSTEM FD Vo1.3) on DRIVE B:\


When stop "CTRL+C"
Press any key to continue

@I VOL3 is installed on the hard disk.

@I The following message appears.

(End/

(3) Installation batch files

The following table lists the installation batch files and their directories.

File name Directory

@ PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk LMPINSTSAT Ic INSTALL

8 PMC-L module floppy disk LINST.BAT Y

$J PMC-M module floppy disk MINST.BAT Y

@ PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk MMINSTBAT gc

@J PMC-NINAQA system floppy disk INSTALL.BAT +JINSTALL

@ PMC- INSTALL.BAT qCINSTALL


RA~/RA~J’AA~RB:‘RB~;RBYRB~/‘RC~RC~!RC~/PA
1IPA3IQCINB system floppy disk

(3 PMC-RAl !RA2IRAS/PAl IPA3 module floppy disk RA12lNST.BAT Y INSTALL

EMC-RB!RB2/RB3;RB4IRCIRC3iRC4 module RBRCINST.BAT Y INSTALL


floppy disk

?) PMC-QC module floppy disk QCINST.BAT Y INSTALL

I@ PMC-NB module floppy disk NBINST.BAT gCINSTALL

(Note) Systems for different PMC models can be installed in the same directory. However,
restrictions may be placed depending on the edition of the software. See Appendix
9 for details. For systems that cannot be installed in the same directory, install them
in separate directories.

1 - 14
3. ACTIVATION

3. ACTIVATION

(1) Activation method

[Operation]
Activate FAPT LADDER with the following commands:

B:\>A:
A:\xD \FLADDER
A: \FLADDER> FLADDER (Note 1)

The initial screen displaying the version of the system and copyright is displayed and the
message below appears.

When a key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed, the main menu below appears.
Select a screen by selecting the function key corresponding to the desired menu item
displayed at the bottom of the main menu screen.

Fi KEY : SETUP

F8 KEY : MNEMONICEDIT

F9 KEY : UT[LlTt

FlO KEY : END

Select a menu item with the corresponding function key.

(Note) Before starting up FAPT LADDER, change the drive and directory in which the
system file exists to the current drive and current directory. If FAPT LADDER is
started up with path designation, or by specifying the current directory, FAPT
LADDER may malfunction.

1-15
3. ACTIVATION

Reference: When an FL.BAT has been created in the directory for which path control is set,
FAPT LADDER can be activated by just typing FL and pressing the [RETURN]
key. An example of a batch file is provided below.

FL.BAT

ECHO OFF
A: (Moves to the drive where the system files are installed.)
cD \FLADDER (Moves to the directory where the system files are installed.)
FLADDER

(2) Termination method

[Operation]
0 Select [END] from the main menu, or press the < ESC > key to return to the initial screen.
Then the following message appears:

END? (Y:END, 0THER:RESllME MENU)

8 Enter Y to return to the MS-DOS command mode. Enter N to return to the main menu.

l-16
4. BASIC OPERATION

4. BASIC OPERATION

4.1 Menu Configuration

The configuration of the menu screens displayed by the system are shown below.

MS-DOS
$- 4
initial screen
f 4 Fl

“’
Main menu- Edit Title data
Ladder diagram
Symbol and comment
Message
I/O module
System parameter

Print Execution
l-Setting

qz[TEXEC Compression (PMC-R seriesKXiNB)

c (PMC-N/NA/RC/RC3!QC4;QC/NB)
LPASCAL (PMC-N, NA)

-PMC writer, FA writer Read


Write
Verification
Blank check
-PMC Download
Upload
-E Comparison
-Handy file/Floppy cassette adapter
-Memory card

(Note 1) The format of the source program of this system is different from that of FAPT
LADDER for the P Series. Thts system uses the mnemonic edit function (F8) to edit a
file having the format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.
(Note 2) An object file has the ROM format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series. This system
reads a sequence program created by the P Series In the ROM file format. The format
of the floppy disk must be converted.

1-17
Diagram of relationships among the functions of the system

P-G - - PC9801 - IBM-PC/AT


FAPT - FAPT LADDER v :: Communication by FEZ-2324
LADDER (Refer to Appendix 1 for cables)
Edit Setup
- . . . . .. . . . . . .
i Source i
; format
: program i
:s qzq+J4
: .. . . .. . . .. . . . U-inch ASC format
ffOPPY

FLOAD98 IFLOADAT

CNC -
. .. . . . .
; ROM ;
; format :4 +q+-+
: program I
: . . . . .. . . . . .. i 3.5inch Binary format Memorv

ffOPPY

FAPT
PASCAL -
. .. . ... .. . .. .
: PASCAL ; II I I fg-pii?-~-

Q I+
: load :- FLPGMS
: module i -+I+ k-1
I 1 I
. .. . . .. . . .. . . .
35inch
ffOPPY
Binary format
Q-l_),
ff3.5inch
OPPY

ASC format
4. BASIC OPERATION

4.2 Common System Operations

The operations described below are basic operations applicable to all screens.

(1) Function keys

When the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video, the user can select the
desired menu item by pressing the corresponding function key.

,
.:,:.:.
;z:,i,:lE :.:_.
::..:::::;
‘j’.,
D,T,i,j,I:(
.j’.,
../ .::.?::is z j;
‘y:)):., pR,$&
:... ..:.
.., :,.: ::::..::
‘j.
)j
;::i,:
3 :;C*MP,i..: 4 j i.&&...y s :;.“:;& i :y:;
:.: ::...: .j,“. .,, .:,: : .‘. fj&“:‘:‘:q , ;::.;&“p~:., * .;&JE+
:. :: 9 5 :.>::;:;;g(, +j ,,
6 ::: ;;:
()

(F,]WI
,,

WI PI F31 IF41 WI F61 WI IF101

(2) Escape key

The escape key <ESC> has the same effect as selecting [END] with the function key. The
escape key terminates the current screen then returns the display to the previous screen in the
menu hierarchy.

(3) Cursor keys

The cursor keys < t >, < 1 >, < + >, and < + > are used to move the cursor to
select input items.
When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen, the second or subsequent cursor
can be moved by pressing the <SHIFT> key together with the < + > or -z -+ > key.

(4) Scroll keys

The scroll keys <ROLL UP> and <ROLL DOWN > scroll the screen up (to display the
previous one page) and scroll the screen down (to display the next one page), respectively (for
the PC9801).
The scroll keys <PAGE DOWN > and <PAGE UP> display the next page and the previous
page, respectively (for the IBM PC/AT).

(5) [INS] key

This key switches between the overwrite mode c 0 > and insert mode -z I >.

(9) [HELP] key

When the < HELP > key is pressed, help information may be output for the specified item.

1-19
4. BASIC OPERATION

(7) Status line

A status line is displayed at the top of the screen.

Main menu PMC-RB2 <O>[A::FLADDER 1

t- Item name t Model currently selected L Current


currently selected directory name

Edit mode (overwritefinsert)

(Note) The indications on the key tops may slightly vary from the descriptions of this
manual. depending on the personal computer used.

(8) Pop-up menu

When the following pop-up menu appears, the desired process can be selected using any of
the three methods described below.

The file already exists.


Fl Update
F2 Quit
F3 Append

1) Cursor movement
To select an item, press the cursor key < ? > or c 1 >, such that the item to be selected
is displayed in reverse video. Then, pressing the <RETURN> key selects that item.

2) Function key
A function key is indicated at the left of each item. To select an item, press the
corresponding function key.

3) Command name
An uppercase letter in (usually, the initial of) an item name is the command name. In the
above case, pressing the letter key -z U >, <Cl>, or <A> can select the Update. Quit, or
Append command, respectively.

l-20
4. BASIC OPERATION

4.3 Model Setting

In this case, the user needs to select the PMC model by selecting [SETUP] before selectrng
another menu item. This setting, once executed, is preserved (i.e. setup need not be repeated).

[Operation]
Select [SETUP].

The setup menu is displayed. (The screen is of PMC-R08.0 version)

PUC-MI
PIIC-RA?
PUC-RA3
PUG-RB
pcuc;;;

PUC-RB4
PIIC-RB4 (STEP Sip:
PMC-RC
*PWC-RC3
PVC-AC4
PVC-RC4 (STEP SW
PUC-PAI
PUC-PA3
PVC-PC
PVC-NB

Select the PMC model using the arrow keys.

Press the <RETURN > key. Then the following message appears and the model name
displayed in the status line changes.

Setup completed.

Select [END].

The display returns to the setup menu screen.

Select [END].

The display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note) When PMC-NA is used, select PMC-N (l/O) on the above screen.

l-21
5. OPERATION

5. OPERATION

5.1 Editing

The source file of a sequence program is edited.

(1) Start

[Operation]
0 Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

Mm. WC
> ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\~~~~~~~~~~ .:’ j ; >&:j

Fl KEY: EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT

F3 KEY : COMPILE

F4 KEY : OECO?kPlLE

Fj KEY : LINK

F6 KEY : I/O

Fi KEY : SETUP

FB KEY : MNEMONICEDIT

F9 KEY : UTILITY

F10 KEY : END

@ The following source file name input screen is displayed:

l-22
5. OPERATION

6! Enter the name of a source program to be edited.


No more than 36 characters can be entered to specify a program name.
An MS-DOS file name must be entered (extension (.xXx) must be excluded).

(i) When a new file is created

6 output
program

(ii) When an existing


Specify the OUTPUT

file is edited directly


PROGRAM NAME only.

6 I/O
program

(ii) When an existing


Specify the same program name in the INPUT PROGRAM
field and OUTPUT

file is modified
PROGRAM

and its contents


NAME field.

are stored in a separate


NAME

file

c
I=7
Specify the name of the existing file to be edited in the
INPUT PROGRAM NAME field. Specify the name of the file
input
nrnnram
, y’vy’““’ , in which to store the program in the OUTPUT PROGRAM
< 2 L-2 NAME field.

To specify a file that exists in the current directory displayed at the status line, enter the file
name. To specify a file in another directory, enter the relative path and the file name.

Example) A : iFLADDER ‘7

-IT
L
t

Current directory DATA ‘- SAMPLE1

i-- SAMPLE2

In this case, the following two lines specify the same file.

A:‘FLADDER’DATA’SAMPLEl

DATA’sAMPLE

l-23
5. OPERATION

@ The following editing menu screen appears:

EDiT ix-x QiNA:wADI;iR\ I

FI kEY : TITLE

I?? RY : LWDEK DI%R+l


F3 m : SMKIL 6 CONEIIT

F4 KFI : ,WSAGE

F5 KEY : I,;0
KIDLLE!

FE hEY : SYSTM P.!J&WTER


FlO kEY : E!lu

($3 Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key.

$3 The editing screen for the selected data appears. For example, the screen below is
displayed when [TITLE] is selected.

EDIT( TITLL) : fPf.z-fc \\/ ,slb~:‘at. :\::’ :: ” f

51 EDITIOSSO
6) PROCRM Ill~~\hlV6
X0
7) MT\ OF I'RO(;ffilWiG

8) PRG-XI IHICSEDBY
9) RUM hRITTL5BY

1 ? 3 4 5 6 iR 9 10 mu

(2) Termination

[Operation]
Q Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.

G3 The following message appears:

l-24
5. OPERATION

(3 Press the desired function key.


(i) When UPDATE is selected, the editing operation is terminated after the results of
editing are written to a file.
(ii) When QUIT is selected, the editing operation is terminated without writing the results
of editing to a file.
(iii) When RESUME is selected, the editing is continued.

@ When UPDATE or QUIT is selected, the display returns to the editing menu screen.
(i) To continue editing, select the appropriate function key.
(ii) To terminate editing, select [END]. The display returns to the main menu.

5.1.1 Title data editing

Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder.

(1) Start

[Operation]
0 Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.

@ The following title editing screen appears:

EMT ( TITLE) MI-is 6hfA:'ZtNXI%'\ f

: IXtLCi'41C-HNEL
RC & FltNI

(2) Input

[Operation]
0 Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 > and < 1 > keys.

l-25
5. OPERATION

e Enter data.

The maximum number of characters usable for each title data item is listed below.
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : 32 characters
MACHINE TOOL NAME : 32 characters
CNC b NC NAME : 32 characters
PMC PROGRAM NO : 4 characters
EDITION NO : 2 characters
PROGRAM DRAWING NO : 32 characters
DATE OF PROGRAMMING : 16 characters
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY : 32 characters
ROM WRITTEN BY : 32 characters
REMARKS : 32 characters

(3) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END] on press the c ESC > key to return to the editing menu screen.

0 The following message appears.

Fl Update
F2 Quit
F3 Edit

0 Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing menu.

5.1.2 Ladder diagram editing

In ladder diagram editing, the user can perform sequence program input, addition, deletion, and
search operations.

(1) Start

[Operation]
@ Select [LADDER] (LADDER DIAGRAM) from the editing menu.

1-26
5. OPERATION

The following ladder diagram editing screen appears:

u StBil PO001
:sp

0 SY=S.:rFE
l-AD=xooo. 0002/6552 -
Q-TEST DAT,A NO I 011030/6553S -
HI- z+F- 3-a 4+3l %kztn + c--,-.. 6 t 9 _t 1ocuBmI

(a) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown. (For the [View] command,
see (5) “Connecting Sequence Program” in Section 3.1.1 of the supplement.)
09 The line shows the name of the file which is being edited, number of the net which is
displayed on the screen, and the number of program steps’maximum number of steps that
can be edited.
(c) The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or label number (L address).
W) The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data at the address selected by the
cursor.
@ AD = X000.0 : Address on which the cursor is placed
8 SY = SAMPLE : Symbol
000216552 Number of current symbols!Maximum number of
symbols
@ CO = TEST DATA NO.1 : Comment
0003Of65535 Number of characters specified in the comment/
Maximum number of characters permitted in the
comment

1-27
5. OPERATION

(2) Function key indications and selection

The ladder diagram editing functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below.

“-@ [coman_d]

QUnder condition CD),holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.
r ::.>,:.: ......:.:,:.
:.,:.:c.::~:~;:i:.:jl :.:,:.:
...\:.:.:
:.:,:,:i..............I. .., ... ....:.:.:,:,~.:.:.:,:.:.:,::.:
:;::,::
.,:::::
........::.:...:.
.:g:.:;er
.:.,_
::~:::~i,~.~:1:I:I.~:
1:1:1:::1:~.:81’:~~~.~:~~:~::.
;.:,I:!y.v.w.,l:... :::::.i’:.:...:.:.:.:,~:.:.:.:.:.:.
, ~~~~~~~ 2 ;,$;!&k&; 3 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:~~
>::.:_:...:.:
.....:.::.
___,..,.).:.:_:.:.‘.l
,.,.
.... ,>:
4 ~~~~~~~:;~~~~~~~
... ........._....
5 ~~~~~~~ 6 :~:~~~~~~~
............y.._7..
,\.,
:.:.:.:.:s..
,.I.:, :..:.: , ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,.:..:.:.:.:_..::
): .:,~):.:.:,‘..,
8 “~:~~:~~~~~~~~~,
.,:,:.:Q..:.)
.. .i::.,.,.,.,.
.,.,,,_
9 ~~~~~~~~~~~:~~~~ , Oii,i’~::i:;~~~I~:::::ii
.,., .~)~);:_:_:.):.:‘:.:.::.~
,.,.
..:.:
.,.,.i,.,.,__.

@ [Delnet]

@ [Search]
... ... ,. ... : ,./.. .. ..,.. .,. ,. . ..:::..:.:...::..: ....:.,_,).
$):: ::,.,
::..‘. ,,.,‘,:
5 ;;,;;w&& 6 ;,&&i; ““‘:7 :i$&“.~. 8 ;. .,~&~:~~.Y: g ‘_.,:_‘,:‘:l:;,~.;i’:i
10,::,;&.;;;:;I..
:.:’ .,.: .C,‘.‘:’ ,.,.,:
.,..:: : ..“.

CB [Copy1 1 Wove1

I, i$$&;:;.; 2 ;:l~a;~&;: 3 : ‘.karch ..I4 5 6 ,., ‘3.” ”..”“’ g .Y’ .: --<;.I’,,. :: :,.
,‘i_down .t;“p,., :,A .:. ..I’ ... .
7.;, . .. ... .

....x. ‘. .. . :.,,::,:: .Y. 8


I

., :. .,<. y
,: :
,,, .. .. * :::;t+r 5 c-up 6 tO-fil 7. to&J. 8. g .: : i.‘, 10 .:,
1 Lj:;::.tii:.:.::..? :. 3 :~..~&~ch : 4 ‘:&own

* [to-org) is displayed in the [File] command mode only. (Thus can be selected.)

@I [File]
Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired
processing from a POP-UP menu.

9 [ sy Edit]

I
I 0xec 2 cancel 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I

1-28
5. OPERATION

(Note) While the function keys of @ are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command of
Q can be executed. For example, entering <A > and [COMAND] on the @ screen
has the same effect as selecting F4 [Adress] on the .a screen. To select a
command of 8 in this way, enter the upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter)
in the corresponding command name shown on the 8 screen.

(3) Sequence program input

For sequence program input, select [LADDER] from the editing menu. The function key
programmer menu is displayed. When no sequence program has been entered, the screen
displays only the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.

At this stage, program input can be started.

Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the ladder diagram.
Examples of basic instruction program input and function instruction program input are shown
below.

(a) Example of basic instruction program input

I x0.1 D30.2 F14.2 Y52.7

3
[Operation ]
Move the cursor to the start position, then press [ -I I- 1.
The [ -I I- ] symbol appears on the screen. The message “HORIZONTAL LINE
ILLEGAL” appears at the lower-right corner of the screen. This message warns the
user that horizontal ladder diagram line creation is not completed. Enter an address
and bit data.

Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press the < RETURN > key. The address is set at
the contact, and the cursor moves right.

As in @ and 8, enter contact A of 030.2.

Enter contact B of F14.2.


Press [ e ] and enter address F14.2. then press the <RETURN> key. The
address is set on contact B and the cursor moves right.

Without moving the cursor, press [ 4 1.


A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawn automatically and a relay coil
symbol appears near the right vertical rail.

l-29
5. OPERATION

Enter address Y52.7. then press the <RETURN > key.


The cursor automatically moves to the input start position on the next line.

Next, enter an OR condition.


Press [ + ] and enter address X2.4, then press the <RETURN > key.
The address is set at contact 6 and the cursor moves right.

Press [ - ] to enter a horizontal line.


To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press the horizontal line key
[ - 1. The line segment will be entered as many times as the number entered.
Note, however, that such a line never exceeds the right vertical rail.

A vertical line extending upward is required for OR. Press [ d ] to enter a


vertical line extending upward.

(b) Example of function instruction program input

For function instruction input, press the function key [functnj. Next, enter a SUB number,
then press the <RETURN> key.
A function instruction can also be entered by entering the function instruction name or SUB
number and pressing the [functn] key.
If the user does not remember a certain instruction name or SUB number, a function
instruction table that lists function instructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be
displayed on the screen.
The table can be displayed just by pressing the [functn] key without entering any data.
Then the function instruction table is automatically displayed.
Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screen from the function instruction
table.

H
. I

I
ACT 1 MOVE (1) (2) (3) (4)
0000 0000 0000 0000

LL
- Output address
Control condition
Input data address
Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

When entering a function instruction with this function, enter the


parameters of the function instruction vertically as shown below.

-It-- MOVE
0000 -c-(l)
SUB 8 0000 --(,a
0000 -(3)
0000 -(4)

l-30
5. OPERATION

[Operation]
@ Enter a control condition.
Press [ -i t- 1. Next, enter an address and bit data, then press the <RETURN>
key. The cursor moves right.

Q Enter a function instruction.


Press the [functn] key. Next, enter SUB number 8, then press the <RETURN > key.
The function instruction diagram shown above appears.

&! Enter the oarameters of the function instruction.


First, enter the high-order 4-bit logical multiplication data of the first parameter, then
press the <RETURN > key. The cursor automatically moves downwards. Enter the
remaining three parameters one by one.

(c) Restrictions and notes on ladder creation

[Restrictions]
@ Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to the portion between the RD
and WRT instructions)
a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted as steps in the
corresponding mnemonic program), the following message appears:
“A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.”
If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.

@ Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display per screen


If an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net lines per screen, the error
described below occurs.
a) Symptom
(a-l) When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following message appears.
“The NET being created is too large.”
If 70 lines are exceeded, the following message appears, and no net is
displayed.
“A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.”

(a-2) When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two or more nets, the following
message appears.
“The NET being created is too large.”
If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or more nets, the following
message appears for a net that is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded,
and the display of the current net is discontinued.
“The NET is larger than the editing buffer.”
In this case, specify the net to be displayed. rrsing the ladder diagram search
function (such as net number search).

b) How to obtain the number of lines per screen


Even if part of a net is displayed on a screen, all lines of the net are included in the

l-31
5. OPERATION

total for that screen. In addition, a space line between nets is counted as a valid line.
The number of lines in each net to be displayed is determined as follows:
(b-l) Basic instructions
One line is comprised of one basic instruction.

b-1- 1 line

L-I *lines

(b-2) Function instructions


The number of lines in a function instruction is: The number of control conditions
or parameters, whichever is greater, plus 1
Examples of calculation follow.

- When the number of control conditions < number of parameters

r
RST
Number of control conditions = 2
Number of parameters = 4
Number of lines = number of
parameters + 1 = 5 lines

- When the number of control conditions > number of parameters

Number of control conditions = 3


RlOO
Number of parameters = 1
Number of lines = number of control
conditions + 1 = 4 lines

1-32
5. OPERATION

(b-3) Data table section of function instructions


The data table section of the COD, CODB, or DISP instruction is calculated as
follows:

When the data table is one or two bytes

Number of lines = number of data tables16 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

1
0000 0000 0000 Number of lines in the data table
0000 0000 0000 section = 11/6
0000 0000 0000 = 1 with remainder 5
0000 0000 = 2 lines
I

When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines = number of data tables/4 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

SUB 27 0005
CODB
0007

0300

D320

1
Number of lines in the data table
00000000 00000000
section = 514
00000000 00000000
= 1 with remainder 1
00000000
= 2 lines

l-33
5. OPERATION

(b-4) Example of calculating the number of lines per screen


For the ladder shown below, the number of fines in the screen display section is
obtained as follows:

- The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and B.


- Number of lines in net A
Function instruction section + data table section = 6 lines -I-+ 8 lines
(3+1) (1116)
I
- The number of lines in net B is 2.

rT
ACT
Net A t- SUB 49 0011
DISP
0003

Screen display section D300


. . .. f . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........

I
I.

000 0000 0000 0000


003 0000 0000 0000
006 0000 0000 0000
009 0000 0000

Net B

: . . . . . . .. .................................................................... ........
Net C

c) Examples of symptoms
Example of symptom (a-l)
- The ladder diagram can be edited only when the “total number of message data steps”
parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than 396. This is because when
the total number of steps is 396, the net consists of 70 lines.
If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or more is created during mnemonic
editing, the following message appears, and the display of the net is discontinued.
“The data table is too large.”

1-34
5. OPERATION

Example of symptom (a-2)


- If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function instruction on the same screen as
that of a basic instruction, the following message is displayed, and the attempt is
rejected.
“The NET being created is too large.”
For example, if the basic instruction net has 68 lines, the MOVE instruction (SUB 8)
cannot be entered, (because the total number of lines exceeds 70). The results of
calculation are described below.

1
68-line net
Display screen
. t+r
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .

! Number of MOVE
i instruction lines =
i number of parameters
; (4) + 1 = 5

:. .. ... .. ..! 68 + 5 = 73 lines

< Measure >


If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the MOVE instruction can be entered.

_ A basic instruction net cannot be entered together with another basic-instruction net, if
the total number of lines is greater than 70.

For example, if a 68-line basic-instruction net is followed by another basic-instruction net,


the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered.

I+‘+ ] 68-line net


Display screen
,..................................................._.___.....,_...........................

I . . . . . . . ]::!j .I...l

< Measure >


If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled. the latter basic instruction can be entered.

- When the CODB instruction (SUB 27) and DISP instruction (SUB 49) are edited on the
same screen, if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message data
steps for the DISP instruction (SUB 49) the following message appears, and the

l-35
5. OPERATION

attempt is rejected.
“The NET being created is too large.”

This symptom also occurs in a combination of two DISP instructions and a combination of
CODB and COD instructions.
For example, if the number of tables for the CODB instruction is 200, the total number of
steps for the DISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum. The calculation results are
shown below.

FIST
-II- 4 bytes
ACT 200 data tables
-II-
Number of CODB
000 00000000 00000000 _ instruction lines = 55

I[ I_
002 00000000 00000000 Function instruction
Display screen
. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. section = 4 parameters
+ 1
196 00000000 00000000 Data table section
198 00000000 00000000 = 20014 = 50

Calculation of DISP
- instruction data items -
that can be entered

Function instruction
sections = 3 parameters
+ 1
Number of remaining
lines = 70 - 55 - 4
= 11 lines
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .
Data tables
= 11%=66

< Measure >


Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display screen makes it possible to set the
total number of steps to 396.

8 Restriction on the maximum number of steps


The maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows:
Without EMS : 21840 steps
With EMS : 24000 steps
Note, however, that the maximum allowable number of steps can decrease, depending
on how memory is used.
If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowable number of steps, editing is
disabled and the following message is displayed:
MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER

l-36
5. OPERATION

[Notes]
CD An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the
ladder program is incomplete (for example, without addresses) or invalid.
A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled.

Q Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen.
However, this restriction does not apply to a sequence program created in mnemonic
format. When a sequence program created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit, it is
displayed over several lines with a continuation symbol.
This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with [ ----- 1. Use [Delnet] (net
deletion) to delete this symbol. (See Item (6) in this section.)

(4) Replacing sections of a sequence program

Lines in an already created sequence program can be replaced in the same way as described
in Item (3) above.
Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enter new data.

(5) Sequence program addition

Press the [comand] soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys
indicated below.
To terminate the programmer menu, press the < ESC > key.

.:.......................................
.......................
................. ,: ................. :,: : :.:.:.: .. .... .... ...

I
: :..:.q.::::. :;. . ‘,,::::
........
.....~:.:::‘.:+~:.~~x~
:zi~~~~~~::
.)

:I,i&&t’ .. ~::::&I&:1 >ji&if:‘$:: $~$z$,$@:i;i $&&$ ~~~;fjiii.~~~! $zzyrdit:::;,


.... :. :..: ,y,:: ... . . :, . ..... .:‘:::I
... ................ .:::.y ::.:.::::::::::::::
................. ..y..
....... .........
.:,.:’ :: ,.:,:: ... .::..: .: .... .:::::.:.:. ... : : ::.:. .:::.:

[Insert]

As described below, there are four types of sequence program addition in a ladder diagram.

(a) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line

l Addition on a line

Move the cursor to the position to add item(s), then enter item(s) in the way described in
Item (3) above.

l-37
5. OPERATION

l When a vertical line affects addition

[Operation]
Move the cursor to the position shown above.

Press [ 4_ ] to delete the vertical line to the left extending upward. This
disappears.

Press [ A ] to create a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor,
then press [ - ). A horizontal line and vertical line are created.

Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact is to be added.

Press [ -j j- ] to add a contact.

(b) When a line is added vertically

-To be added

To add a line vertically. an area is required for the addition. To create such an area, the
lower part of the ladder diagram must be shifted down by one line. To do this, move the
cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines, then press the [insnet]
key.
Each time the [insnet] key is pressed, the lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted one
line down to create an area for addition. Make an addition in this area.
After line addition, any remaining area (as in the case where two lines are added in an area
large enough for three lines) can be left as it is.

[Operation]
@ Move the cursor to any point in the ladder dragram enclosed in dashed lines.

G? Press [insnet].
The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line.

l-38
5. OPERATION

When the [insnet] key is pressed without entering a numeric value, one line is inserted.

When the [insnet] key is pressed after entering a numeric value, the number of lines
specified is inserted.

Move the cursor to the desired position and press [ -_( l-j. Then set address data
and press the <RETURN > key. The the cursor moves right.

Press the [ L ] soft key to create an OR circuit.

(c) Line insertion in a single-net sequence program

Blank lines are inserted one by one.

[Operation)
0 Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the [insfin] key. The entered
number of lines is inserted.
(When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a number, just one line is added.)

If the [inslin] key is pressed when the cursor is positioned as shown in the left-hand
figure. a blank line is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure.

(d) Element insertion in a single-net sequence program

Elements are added one by one.

[Operation]
0 Enter the number of elements to be inserted, then press the [inselm] key. The entered
number of elements is inserted.
If the character <A> is prefixed to the number of elements to be inserted and the
[inselm] key is pressed. elements are inserted after the cursor.
(If the [inselm] key is pressed without entering the number of elements to be inserted,
just one element is inserted.)

_‘~&$+ - ,I <c..mm I I
II n.. :.>:.....:.>:... (.
I

4
Cursor

1-39
5. OPERATION

If the (inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in the left-hand
figure, an element is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure. The element is
inserted before the cursor.

If the character <A> is entered and the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is
placed as Shown in the left-hand figure, an element is inserted as shown in the right-
hand figure. The element is inserted after the cursor.
-_ -

(6) Deletion in asequence program

(a) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursor at the location to be deleted
-_
&td pressing one of the below three soft keys

[ e__--
1 : Deletes a horizontal line, relay contact, relay coil, etc.
[4 I: Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the left of the cursor.
1 2 ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor.

(b) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from an RD instruction to a WRT
instruction).

(c) Multiple nets can be deleted one by one.

[Delnet] 1

[Operation]
Deletion
Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, then press the [Delnet] key. The net to be
deleted is displayed in red.

Deleting multiple nets


Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key, [c-down] key, or [search]
key, then display the nets to be deleted In red. If the [c-down] key is pressed after a
numeric value is entered. the cursor moves as many times as the entered numeric
value.

Execution : Press the [exec] key.


Cancellation : Press the [cancel] key.

l-40
5. OPERATION

@ When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move the cursor to the first net to
delete, enter the number of nets to delete. then press the [Delnet] key. With this
operation, steps G and 8 can be omitted.

(7) Searching in a sequence program

A sequence program can be searched using the following soft keys:

(Search1 1

When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program is displayed on the screen
and the cursor is moved to the start of the program.

(b) [bottom]
When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and
the cursor is moved to the end of the program.

(c) [srchl
Search operation using this key searches the program for aspecified address from the
current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When an address
is found, it is displayed on the screen. An address to search for can be specified in one of
two ways.

0 Address specification usina the cursor


Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press the [srch]
key. This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current
location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
If the specified address is found, the section of the program containg the address is
displayed on the screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found address.
If the search operation fails to find the specified address, the cursor does not move.
To terminate searching, press the c ESC > key.

l-41
5. OPERATION

Gll.6

-- When the same address as this address


is to be searched for. move the cursor to
Y49.1
this position, then press the (srch] key.

D32.0
II

F54.1 ,.“’ GE.1

x0.4 -
II . When the same address is found,
II
the cursor moves to this location.
x0.5 021.2

Address soecification bv address inout


Enter the address to find with the keyboard, then press the [srch] key.
This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current location
of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
When the specified address is found, the section of the program containing the address
is displayed on the screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found
address.
If the search operation fails to find the specified address, an error indication appears.

04 (w-srch] (WRT coil search)


This key is used to search the program for a relay coil with a specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When a relay coil
is found. it is displayed on the screen. If multiple relay coils are found, the coil which is the
closest to the cursor is displayed
The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified in one of two ways.

@ Address soecification usino the cursor


Move the cursor to the relay coil with the address to search for, then press the [w-
srch] key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program
containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error
indication appears.

@ Address specification bv address inout


Enter the address of relay coils to search for with the keyboard, then press the (w-
srch] key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

l-42
5. OPERATION

When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program
containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error
indication appears.

(e) [n-srch] (net-number search)


This key displays those ladders that have a specified net number, starting from the top of
the screen. If the [n-srch] key is pressed without entering a number, the display is
advanced by one net.

(f) [s-srch ] (function-instruction search)


This key searches for function instructions. Searching is performed by entering a function
instruction name or number, then pressing the [s-srch] key. If the [s-srch] key is pressed
while the cursor is on a function instruction, function instructions with the same number as
that function instruction are searched for.

(g) Search operation using the cursor keys (< c >, -z + >)
l Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. The address is searched for.
l Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. The NET No. is searched for.
l Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by a function instruction number,
then press a cursor key. The function instruction is searched for.
Example: Enter Sl, then press a cursor key. The function instruction END1 is
searched for,

(h) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)


When the source program type is “FORMAT-B/C”, global searching in all main/sub-
programs is enabled.
Refer to “APPENDIX 6 Managing a Source Program” for source program type.

1) The range of search


All programs, which include a currently displayed subprogram, are searched for.
The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of P address.
a) From the current cursor position to bottom of currently opening subprogram.
b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.
c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address is small next to a).
d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

l-43
5. OPERATION

G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the < ESC > key or the [cancel] key.

A
__1. 1st net of LEVEL1
8
I@
@
@
t displaying on
m t cursor one of Whole
the screen subprograms program
@ 1
0
@

Final net of the maximum numbered subprogram


Th v

(Searching in the order of @ -@I)

a Searching result
When the object of search is found, the cursor will move to the position.
In case of finding in another program the program which is currently displayed will be
closed.
Then, the program which contains the object, will be opened to display the object
position with the cursor.
At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are
modifications in the program to be closed.

When two or more objects exist, the result of search are displayed in order of 1) one
by one.

l-44
5. OPERATION

3) Operation
The global search is operated with the following function key.
0

(comand]
J
8 [comand]

@ Select the [G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 8

[G-SRCH] 1

(Shortcut command is ” <G > + [COMMAND]“)

a) Beginning of “G-SRCH” mode


It switches to the mode of “G-SRCH” by the operation of 0 + 9.
After that, all programs are searched unless quitting “G-SRCH” mode.

b) Execution of search
Refer to “(c) [search]“,“‘(d) [w-srchj”Y(e) [s-srch]” in “(7)Searching in a sequence
program”, for how to specify the target of global search.

c) End of “G-SRCH” mode


“G-SRCH” mode is ended by pushing < ESC > or [CANCEL] key. The end method is
different individually.
- <ESC> = Only “G-SRCH” mode is ended. The program on the opening now
is the state as it is.
- [CANCEL] = It returns to the program which was opened at beginning the “G-
SRCH” mode. The program on the opening now closes.
Whether will save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are
modifications in the program which IS currently displayed.

Copying sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net. Specify the net to be copied. The
net can be copied in the same file that IS being edited or Into another file. The selected net
remains as it was.

l-45
5. OPERATiON

File which is beinq edited

Specified file
[COPY1
Range to be copied

[until]

Fig. 51.2 (6)

[COPY]

.,:/..:...\:::..:
..:...;.
. .:,:,y . . . . . :.>;.x ,:.y

I I
‘...,’ :, .‘.Z’_’ ,” . . ...‘).’ .:.:.::,:.:.‘.:.‘:.:.:,:.;,, ..:.:.:...:.:.:.::.‘...:.:.:.:.L:.,. :.:.:i’i .‘.....‘.:.:Q:.:.:~:.:.~.:.: 1:.

$$:::;$$,j:$;~:
$ ++t
:.:.:.:.:.:.:,‘.‘:y(.:.~.:::

:I;, $‘S;+b ;; ;:&J&&,l $+.:.


~~i~~~~~~,~~~
~:~~pI~~, j@$j$$
:: ::..:.:- ,. .::::::::: .:.:.:.:i.::,.:::::::: .,:.:..::::: .~:::.:.:.~.:::.:.;::..‘_,._. :.:

[Operation]
Copying a net
Place the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy] key. The selected net is
displayed in yellow.

Copying two or more nets


To select the nets to be copied, first move the cursor to the first net of the range to be
copied, then move the cursor to the net at the other end of the range to be copied by
pressing the cursor up, cursor down, [c-up], [c-down], or [search] key. The selected nets
are displayed in yellow.
Alternatively, enter a numeric value and press the [c-up] or [c-down] key. The cursor
moves according to the specified value.

Setting the net or nets to be copied


Press the [until] key.

Specifying the copy destination using the [to] key (Copying the net or nets in the same
file)
Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and press the (to] key. The

l-46
5. OPERATION

selected net or nets are copied immediatelv above the CODY destination specified by the
cursor. To copy the selected net or nets two or more times, enter the number of times
they are to be copied before pressing the [to] key.

c3 Specifying the copy destination using the [to-fill key (Copying the net or nets into another
file)
1) Press the [to-fit] key. The following message is displayed.
If no program is specified, LATMP is created.
i:~l::::::~~:l::t’:l:::ill:~:~~:~:~:~:~
.:......$.,, ‘.’‘;:
:‘.‘?:(“.‘.”
.:.:::::::.,.,. ::::::ix::::
~:~~.:.:.:.:.:c.:.:.:.::~~~~:~:~:~:~~~::ii:
:::.:.:..:...:...:.:.:.))::
- c, .‘:::
:::::::
:......:,:,
...,,:.
.:::;.:~ :
j)) : ::.:,: ................,.::
..... .y.:.“:.:~l:~‘.~:..:‘.~.‘:
.,...:.,,,...,:.
(LATMP file: Provisional work file used in editing)
*
2) Enter the-name of the file into which the net(s) is to be copied and press the
<RETURN > key.
3) Select desired processing from the following POP-UP menu:

/I

4) If the selected destination file is present, the following POP-UP menu is displayed.
Select desired processing from the menu.

The file already exists.


~1 Update Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces the
previous data of the file.
F2 Quit Cancels output to the selected file.
F3 Append Appends the copy to the selected file.

@ If the nets to be copied are known beforehand, place the cursor on the first net to be
copied, enter the number of nets to be copied, then press the [Copy] key. Steps @, ai,
and @ can be skipped.

(Note) Incorrect nets cannot be copied.

(9) Moving sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be moved net by net. Specify the net or nets to be
copied. The selected net or nets can be moved to another place in the same file that is being
edited or output to another file. The selected net or nets are deleted.
The only difference between copying and moving is that the selected net or nets are deleted in
moving.

-tIWlet Delnet Insert Adress Search WY Move File syEdit

[Move]

until cancel search c-down c-up

to cancel search c-down C-UP to-fil +org

l-47
5. OPERATION

[Operation]
Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 0 to $3 for copying.

(Note) incorrect nets cannot be moved.

(10) Combining a sequence program

A source program can be combined to another source program that is being edited.
The source program to be combined can be displayed and edited separately, then combined to
the original source program that is being edited.

Original screen View screen


r
File being edited
[}-9 (original file)

Section to be edited
1 Edit

t
I F-01
Combine
Edited file to be
combined

Fig. 51.2 (7) Combining a Sequence Program

The model specified for the FAPT LADDER system must agree with the PMC model of the file
to be entered on the original screen. However, the file to be combined can be specified for
(TO) or entered for (VIEW) even if the two models do not agree with each other. (If a
disagreement is found, a warning message is displayed.)
In this case, no errors will be detected even if the file to be combined contains an address
range or function instruction format that does not agree with the specified model. (The error
will be detected in compilation.) When ignoring the warning message to continue the
operation, extreme care is needed.

l-48
5. OPERATION

1) Function keys

[Comand ]
..‘.,.:,. :!.. .. .. ..
~ BPiiiei:’ ” ::.
I_lnreti. ” : :“Adiers
:.
Se&&. j r &,fjjf ;:;:: ;,.:&qove.. & syEdii
inmet

ORIGINAL = display when the file is opened for the first time
View = display when the file is opened using the [File] command
PMC Model on which editing is carried out on the View 1 screen

- ORICISAL = Initial displa) at opening the file


= Display opened by [Filel comand
-- Model of PMC edited in View screen

EDIT .~LAN!Eii: VlCW Kmmm


A: YFLADDERFTEST. :LA: PYC-fiC3 NET 00001-00002 STEi
; x000.0 YOOO. 0
+z; ”

+ SliB71 I PO@@I
ISP I

sY=sAwlE 0002/6552 1

Fig. 51.2 (8) Screen Displayed when a File is Opened by the (File] Command

l-49
5. OPERATION

2) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program

Specify an insertion point (The


data is inserted immediately
above the cursor.)
I

[ Press thl:LE] key 1

) Specify ; view file 1

c POP-UP menu >


4 (View) + (To)
Shows the ladder Combines the file with
diagram of the file to be the Ladder program on
combined (View screen) the original screen

1. Check the displayed 1. The file is


data of the file to be immediately
combined combined. The
2. Edit the data of the data of the file is
file to be combined not displayed.
and combine it

Edit the Ladder program


on the view screen
(Normal editing)

I Press the c ESC > key to terminate


< POP-UP menu s
editing

+ (Save) $ (Edit)

Saves the Ladder Returns to the ladder


program shown on the diagram screen (The
view screen view screen is
continued.)

* 1: The name of the provisional work file is LATMP.

Fig. 51.2 (9) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program

1 - 50
5. OPERATION

3) Examples

Example 1. Combining a sequence program file

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the <RETURN > key.

From the following menu, select Fl (To).

The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original
screen)

Example 2. Combining a modified sequence program

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the <RETURN > key.

From the following menu, select F2 (View).

Edit the Ladder program on the view screen. To terminate editing, press the
<ESC> key. (Ladder editing can be performed and terminated in the
conventional way.)

l-51
5. OPERATION

@I From the following menu, select Fl (Save).

Temp (Outputs the data to the LATMPm file.)

8 Return to the screen of step-@‘and check -the name of the file output in step @.
Then, select Fl (To).
Y
.- @I -The-file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original
screen)

Example 3. Combining a specified section of a sequence program

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the <RETURN> key.

From the pop-up menu, select F2 (View).

Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specify a desired range with
(until].

From the following function menu, select [to-org]. (Specify insertion into the
original screen.)

[until]

to cancel search c-down c-up to-fil to-org

From the following menu, select Fl (Exec).

jj

The data is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original
screen)

1-52
5. OPERATION

(11) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editing screen

On the ladder diagram editing screen, a symbol and comment added at the specified address
can be edited.

[Comand]

[syEdit] 1

I I
::,Y;~y~r”::~:~ .: ~~:;~::;:‘:::
i:.,:,:j ::
:ig:::iexee+:: aiijans~l, j3
..I. .?. .A. .. ..
: .. ..
,.,., .,.,. ,:

[Operation]
Specifying an address
To edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram, place the cursor on the corresponding
address and press the (syEdit] key.

Editing the symbol and comment


The cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom right part of the screen. Edit
the symbol and press the <RETURN > key. The cursor moves to the comment field.

Terminating editing
(exec] key : Terminates editing after modifying the data.
[cancel] key : Terminates editing without modifying the data.

(12) Abbreviated input with the [cornand] key

Each function key can be directly selected with the [comand] key. Enter one of the character
strings below, then press the [comand] function key. Those portions that are enclosed in
brackets can be omitted.

I (nsert) D (elnet) (SY)E NW


S (earth) c (OPY)
M (ove) F (ile)

The function keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations.

(Note) The keys [k or L ] and [J orJ ] are used to create or delete a vertical line
extending upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical
line is for creation and the dashed vertical line IS for deletion. The menu item applying
to a function key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.

l-53
5. OPERATION

(13) ZOOM

When the source program type is “FORMAT-B”, it is realized with easy operation to refer and
edit another subprogram, which is called by the CALU CALLU instruction from the program
now on the opening.
For the source program type, refer to “APPENDIX 6 Management a source program”.

1) Start up of zoom
a) Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALUCALLU instruction and push the
<RET> key.

b) The program now on opening hides from the editing screen. Then the subprogram
which is specified by the parameter in mentioning above appears on the screen.

2) Start up under editing


When ZOOM is attempted while editing the program, the preservation of modifications will
be inquired. Select either.

II
Close the current program.
Fl Save 8 zoom
F2 Cancel I

3) End of ZOOM
When the end operation with the =zESC > key is attempted in the program editing screen
by ZOOM, it will return to the state when ZOOM is started. Moreover, it is possible to
return to the program configuration screen all at once.

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

Fl Save(update) & quit


F2 Quit
F3 Renamesave & quit
F4 Edit
F5 Main

a) Fl:Save(update) & quit


It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current
program screen is preserved.

b) F2:Quit
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current
program screen is cancelled.

l-54
5. OPERATION

c) F3:Rename, save & quit


It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current
program screen is preserved into specified subprogram name.

(14) List of subprograms in use

The list of subprograms called from currently displayed program is displayed.

For the function. refer to the., “chapter 12. Creating a step sequence (14) List"of "FAPT
LADDER (personal computer) supplementary operator’s manual B-66131/04-6”.
Only the operation is described here.

1) Operation
The command “List” is operated with the following function key.
0

[comand]
1
8 [comand]
...... ,.,:.:
........ ..........
............................................ : .......... ..:. I :,,,:
Iy::‘.Ii:‘: ;.,,:;<;;;:<.y ......... .........,,.,:
:.... ....ix,? .y,:+:)( ........
..:. ‘j. ......
: : ‘: ..........
::.IQi
1$$$i&$;;$ 2 :‘~,~i5t~ 3 $$$&$:$j;j4 ‘.$&&&r$r_i ‘j ;;&&&;i 6 $$;$$.tt$$7 ~&~~~
...... : ..:.......
8 ~~>:,.$&$;~~$ g $;&gijllia@:ii, o:~~:~~:.:~:~~~,d~~
.....: .................... .. .......... : ......,: ......

@ Select the [List] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 8
..,.
.::,.
.:,.
. :..:.....; ./. :.,..
i..::.:.:.:.._‘,‘...‘........‘.,.~.~i.,~~
~, :..., ..,.
:. ....:.:.,.:
I ..I
,.. .. :

i~~~~~~~~~i:aii
.A.. . . . . . .I .. .. : .::,::.:.. .. fZy... ..:.:.;:.:. :..,. I’I’I:I:I:i:i’:
.,y,.:. :.:::,.

:!:::~::.~$~:,.,~~~~ 5 $$,e)!$::i; 6 ‘:i:


:iil.::‘~;:i~~~~~~jxi g ~~;i::~iis::::iiii
1 ,(...... .:.>y.
..: :::,., ~,
2
., ... 3 Qqiiaiiiij:iii~~~~~~
::.:: :. 4 :il~,id,iri;i3:,~:~
.. :
7 iil~;~~~~:
. .\. .:.::; .L... )‘.
8 ~~~i~~~~riiiilli
. ....
Or;.;$,Lift j,:
.::,:.:::.y::/~ :. :,:,: :::j
1 ::l)j

(Shortcut command is ” < L > + [COMMAND]“)

(15) To edit Net comment

It is able to write the comments between ladder nets. These comments are called “Net
comment”, and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.

1) To enter Net comment


a) Move the cursor to the position you want to write a net comment.
And then press ” <Shift > + [netcmt]“.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4


n

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4


+*I A

l-55
5. OPERATION

b) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the area for comment enclosed by
‘(” and “)’ is inserted.
Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor, and type comment sentence onto
the area.
The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by two lines (four lines at four lines
display mode) automatically according to the comment sentences. Every Net comment
can expands up to a hundred lines.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4


n

R120.3
=Li” character cursor
(’ Net comment is written in here. 4 9
(* All characters you can enter are available. ‘)

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4


+H-

2) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment

a) To determine the editing Net comment, press [ end ] or < ESC>. Then the editing
comment is fixed, and the Net comment editing mode is finished.

b) To cancel the editing Net comment, press [cancel]. The new Net comment will be
cancelled and erased.

Note) The number of characters in a Net comment is limited to 4095 bytes: counting one
ASCII character as one byte, one Japanese kana as one byte, one kanji character
as two bytes.
‘Line feed’ is also available on Net comment. Line feed is helpful to save memory
for Net comment.

3) To modify Net comment

a) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press
” <Shift > + [netcmt]” or < RET > . The Net comment editing mode becomes active,
and the Net comment will be ready to modify its contents.

b) At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line into Net comment, press [inslin].

(’ Net comment is written in here. ‘)


(’ All characters you can enter are available. I::: 3

1-56
5. OPERATION

[inslin] will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one line, and make a blank line
at the cursor position.

(’ Net comment
..
is written in here. l
)
(’ y:
:. . ‘)
(’ All characters you can enter are available. ‘)
(’ l
;
c) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press [dellin].

(’ Net comment is written in here. 3


:.:.:.:
(* Net comment will expand or shrink automatically. .iz 3
(’ All characters you can enter are available. 3
(* 3

[dellin) will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one
line.

(’ Net comment is written in here. ‘)


(’ &I characters you can enter are available. ‘)

d) To exit from Net comment editing mode, press [ end ] or < ESC >.

e) To cancel the modifications you have just made, press [cancel]. [cancel] will abandon
the modifications and the Net comment will be restored as it was before the
modifications.

4) To delete Net comment

There are two ways to delete Net comment.

- Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets.


“[command] + [Delnet] --) specify area to delete -+ [exec]”

- Entering Net comment editing mode by ” c Shift > + [netcmt]” or <RET > with the
cursor on the Net comment which you want to delete, and then press [delete].

5) Lost Net comment

A Net comment consists of the information of position in sequence program which is called
“Net comment pointer”, and “Net comment string data” which is comment sentences
themselves. These two elements are usually combined one to one to make a Net
comment, but the partner might be lost by illegal file operations or something, such as
copying the ladder file “‘.#LA” or modifying the Net comment data file “NETCMT.OOO” by
user. When a Net comment pointer loses its Net comment string data, the Net comment is
called “Lost Net comment”.
Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net comment enclosed by ‘I(“’ and “‘)” which is
displayed in purple or dimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be

1 - 57
5. OPERATION

normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can be edited as a normal Net
comment, such as deletion, copying and so on.

(16) To edit New page

It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder diagram. This specification of
the position is called “New page”, and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.

1) To enter New page


a) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. And then press ” -z Shift > +
I paw I”.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4


A

R120.3
xl-+’
R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4
+Hf A
w

b) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the mark of New page is inserted.

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y2000.4


n
v
R120.3
x-+
<New page>

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4


+HI n

2) Other operation to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder nets. The operations such as
copying [ Copy 1, moving [ Move 1, and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effective on
New page.

(17) Terminating editing of a sequence program

[Operation ]
@ Press the (ESC > key on the following editing screen.

l-58
5. OPERATION

The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears.

1Fl Save(update) & quit


F2 Quit
F3 Renamesave & quit
F4 Edit
F5 Main

a) 1:Save(update) 81quit
After current content of the editing is preserved, the editing screen will be ended.

W F2:Quit
After current content of the editing is cancelled, the editing screen will be ended.

F3:Renamesave & quit


After current content of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the
editing screen will be ended.

d) F4:Edit
The c ESC > key operation is canceled and it returns to the editing screen of former.

e) F5:Main
With the operation “a)“.“b)” or “c)“, it returns to the program screen where ZOOM
was started. But with this operation, it returns to a program configuration screen at all
once from the nested state.

Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to the program configuration screen,
the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started.

When error net exists


When the error net exists, ” ERROR NET NO.” is displayed and the end menu is not
displayed. Cope this case by the following.

a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of the error is released, the end
operation will be done.

b) When pressed <ESC> key in the state of 0 after “CAN” is typed (meaning of
CANCEL), the menu of 6, will be displayed.
- When Save is ordered, it will be preserved after removing the error net.
- When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to the state before editing by
cancelling the content of the editing.

l-59
5. OPERATION

5.1.3 Symbol and comment editing

The definition of terms

Terms definition and uses display

Symbol Name assigned uniquely to each relay/


x0.0 INPUT
(Extended) coil, to be used in place of PMC address
++++I--

Relay comment Text assigned to relays/coils to explain


(New) them.
;w
COMMEiT CO&NT

Coil comment Text assigned to coils to explain them.


(Extended and YO.0 HERE IS
Renamed, old COIL
--I
name: Comment) COMMENT

Net comment Text assigned between ladder nets to


explain them.
$n_
t- COMMENT ‘1

Tables for Symbol & Comment specifications

In FAPT LADDER, you can assign names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays, and can add
notes to a sequence program.

Symbol/Comment for l/O signals and internal relays

1) Ver. 8.1 or earlier

I Data kind Symbol Relay comment 1 Comment

Available ASCII characters Not supported ASCII characters


characters (lower- case alphabetic Japanese kanal
characters not allowed) kanji characters
(Note 1)

6 bytes Not supported 30 bytes

IMaximum
number

Duplicated
6552 entries

Not allowed
Not supported 64 kbytes - 1 byte
I (65535 bytes)

definition

Display on Yes
t-CRT’ MDI

l-60
5. OPERATION

2) Ver. 8.4 or later

Data kind Symbol Relay comment Comment

Available ASCII characters ASCII characters ASCII characters Japanese


characters (lower- case Japanese kanal kana/
alphabetic kanji characters kanji characters
characters not (Note 2) (Note 1)
allowed)

Maximum 16 bytes 16 bytes 30 bytes


character

Maximum 20,000 entries 20,000 entries 20, 000 entries


number (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3)

Duplicated Not allowed Allowed Allowed


definition

Display on Yes, if it is 6 bytes or No Yes, if the symbol assigned


CRT/MD1 shorter. to the same address is 6
(Note 4) bytes or shorter. (Note 4)

Note 1) CRTiMDl can not display Japanese characters, replaced to blank.


(Japanese characters can be handled with only PC98 series)
Note 2) Japanese characters in relay comment are replaced to blank when printing.
Note 3) Free area size of hard drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer may restrict
them.
Note 4) When the total size of all coil comments exceeds 64 kbytes, no symbols and
comments are displayed on CRTIMDI.

Comment for ladder sequence program

* Ver.8.4 or later

I Data kind Net comment

Available characters ASCII characters


Japanese kana/kanji characters
Line feed (Note 1)
I

Steps to occupy 2 steps/Net comment

Maximum charactersiline 64 charactersiline


4095 characters/Net comment (Note2)

Maximum lines 100 lines/Net comment (Note2)

Maximum number About 20,000 Net comments (Note3)

Display on CRT/MD1 No

Note 1) Japanese characters are replaced to blank when printing.


Note 2) The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the Net comment.
Note 3) Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum number of Net
comments. Free area size of hard drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer may
further restrict them.

l-61
5. OPERATION

Before using extended symbol comment

Note the followings in case of using extended symbofcomment.

1) These functions are available to the undermentioned PMC setting.


- PMC-RB4!RB4( STEP)
- PMCRC4/RC4(STEP)
- PMC-RBSiRB6
- PMC-NB2

2) Source programs for above-mentioned PMC, created with ver.8.1 or earlier, need
conversion.

The operation is the followings.


a) Prepare source programs and start the ver.8.4.
b) Adapt PMC setting to a source program.
cl Convert it into ALL-format mnemonic data.
4 Reconvert the mnemonic data into a source program with another program name.

The conversion is completed by above-mentioned procedure.

3) There is no operation in case of creating new source program.

l Moving the cursor

< +- >, < + 7, <t 7, < 5_ 7 Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.

<Shift> + <c>,<+> Moves the cursor to another position within the field to
be edited.

l Entering a comment in Japanese


When a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used, a comment can be entered in
Japanese. When a comment containing kana characters or m-type alphanumeric characters is
compiled (a ROM-format file is created), all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric
characters are replaced with spaces.

To sstart the front-end processor for Japanese word input, press < CTRL > and < XFER 7

the keys.
For the operation of the front-end processor for Japanese word input, see the corresponding
manual.
To exit from the front-end processor for Japanese word Input. press the < CTRL 7 and
‘<I keys.

1-62
5. OPERATION

(1) Start

[Operation]
@ Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu.

8 The following symbol and comment editing screen appears:

3l
_.~
~UDKESS SFWL COWEST
0001 XUOOO. 0 SIY-:. CUWEST I?Z’PUT SLWLE So. 1
lm2 x0000. 1 W-B CLMEXT INPUT WC’LE ho. 1
IJUO3 )ilJOUlJ. 2 WI-C COWXT lX’CT SLWLE Xo. 1
! UllO‘l 5oouu.3 m-i CUWST ICPUT SUW’LE hc. 1

I
I
!

111 t ; MD I ( F4 or SBIFT - F1 ) key hhen you add Address data.


1,s~ I SIllA 4 <- -> key wen YOU mve cursor by a character.
1 ZSEARCR 3 MEA 4 f&B 5. GDELETE 7 ,‘. 8’CUPY SPASTE 10 EiB

(2) Entering a new symbol and comment

A new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which no symbol or comment is
assigned.

[Operation]
Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

An input window opens on the screen.

1 [ 1I
t t t
Address field Symbol field Comment field

Enter an address in the address field.

The symbol field is shown in reverse video.

Enter a symbol.

The comment field is shown in reverse video.

Enter a comment.

1-63
5. OPERATION

@
.- The entered address, symbol, and comment are cleared from the window and entered into
the file.

When no symbols and comments are entered, the system is automatically set to receive new
data.

(3) Editing a symbol and comment

A symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited.


-_ .-
-
[Operation]. - I
@ If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT] to exit from that state.

8 Move the cursor by pressing the < c >, <+>, < T >, or c 1 > key and edit the data.

To move the cursor within a field, while pressing the e Shift > key press the < cz- or e -+>
key.

(4) Moving a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address.

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.

Select [DELETE].

The following message appears on the screen.

1Comment data copied to paste buffer 1

Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be moved.

Select [PASTE).

(5) Copying a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address.

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.

2 Select [COPY].

0 The following message appears on the screen.

l-64
5. OPERATION

1Comment data copied to paste buffer 1

@ Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be copied.

8 Select [PASTE].

(6) Searching for a symbol or address

[Operation]
@ Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

8 The following input window appears on the screen.

SEARCH :

0 Enter the symbol or address to be searched for and the data number.

@ The system searches for the symbol or address and the data number in that order. The
cursor is moved to the searched data.

(7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment

(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the NO field.

C3 Select [DELETE]. Both the symbol and the comment are deleted.

(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field.

8 Select [DELETE]. Only the selected symbol or comment is deleted.

(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.

(2 Select [AREA]. The entire line is displayed in reverse video, and the following
message appears on the screen.

Running! Appoint extent

1-65
5. OPERATION

Q Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

@ Select [DELETE]. All the data displayed in reverse video is deleted.

(8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing

[Operation]
0 On the edit screen, select [END] or press the <ESC> key.

8 The following message appears on the screen:

Update (Saves the edited data.)


Qutt (Cancels the edited data.)
1 !i 1 Edit (Returns to editing.)
J

0 Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.

(9) Editing screen (the case of model setting is PMC-RBWRB4 (STEP)/RCWRC4 (STEP))

*Symbol entry number Coil comment size (byte)


I+
CRT/MD1 can display / Total CRT/MD1 can display / Total
I I
EDIT ( SYMBOL 6 COMMENT ) PMC-RB4 <O>[A:%FLvDATA%RB4 1
I
SYYMBOL 000001/000003 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090
NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT y (Notel)
IV I I I I
00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA
00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB
00003*X00000.2 CCCCC cccccccccccccccc ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc
1
'*' means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

Note 1) ‘T’ is the indicator. Symbol/comment are displayed with turning at this point in ladder
diagram editing screen.

(10) Searching by a part of strings


Search function is active for specified field, LINE NO.IADDRESSiSYMBOLGELAY or COIL
COMMENT.
Especially you can find relay!coil comment, which is too long, by specifing a part of data
strings.

l-66
5. OPERATION

1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search.
Furthermore, the display of function-key changes as the undermentioned.

, .:;: &.<]:; .-.;


:,,:
.:.,
:;. _....
.. 2:.

2 ,:,.ADRs ..; 3 .SYMB$4


-. . . ..

;: f$@f.j.
.. ... . . .. ..;....
.,. .
:\\y .:.

5 ;: .:C,o’$
: ..
.,.,.,.

.,: 6 I’ .:,,,::;j::i::jj)j::
.+.. ::...

..
.,.,.

.. :
, $pj.:i”““:::“,
.,\ .,

,. ,,. 8
‘. ‘::.:
..:.
_I...

:“.
..... . ... .. 9 ::y .:y .:.:.:<

:. .,..::.‘:;::..{:...
, o ....;;:, ..: : .,
... ,,
:.. I

2) Input strings and specify the data kind for searching by function-key.
A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

3) If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.

l-67
5. OPERATION

5.1.4 Message editing

An arbitrary message can be displayed on the CRT!MDI screen of the CNC, using the DISPB
instruction (SUB 41), which is one of the function instructions. Such a message is created as
described below.

5.1.4.1 Types and quantity of characters that can be used

The types of characters usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC model to another, as
listed below.

I I Characters that can be entered

CNC/PMC JIS levels 1 Full-size Half-size Alphanumeric


and 2 hiragana katakana characters

PMC-RB/RB2/RB3/RB4!RB5/
F16 A 0 0 0
RBG.‘RCIRC3IRC4

F18 PMC-RAl IRA2’RA3 A 0 0 0

F15B PMC-N:NA/NB X X 0 0

ra’,“’ PMC-PAlIPA3 X X 0 0

(A : Some characters cannot be displayed. They cannot be checked by FAPT LADDER.)

The half-size kana and alphanumeric characters can be entered using the kana and alphanumeric
keys on the keyboard. Similarly to symbols and comments, Japanese-language text can be edited
using the Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). The number of characters is limited
as follows:

1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used : 62 characters


2) When only half-size kana characters are used : 127 characters
3) When only alphanumeric characters are used : 256 characters

5.1.4.2 Edit procedure

The edit method that can be used varies between the CNCIPMC model in which Japanese
language (excluding half-size characters) can be used and other models. This section describes
the procedure common to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered), using the PMC-
RC as an example.

(1) Startup

[Operation]
$9 Select [MESSAG] (message) from the edit menu

l-68
5. OPERATION

@ The following message data edit screen appears. (Fig. 51.4)

1 002 ,401:.!

! 003 .AOO.2

; 004 ,400. ,’

Fig. 51.4 Message Data Edit Screen

(2) input

[Operation]
0 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

C~J Key in the desired message data.

(3) Modification

[Operation]
@ Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

Q The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there.

a Place the cursor at the location where modification is required. using the cursor keys.

@ Key in the desired characters to modify the message data.

@ Press the <RETURN> key.

(4) Search [TOP] [BOTTOM]

[Operation]
0 On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].

QJ The cursor moves to the start or end message address.

1-69
5. OPERATION

(5) END

(Operation]
@ On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC > .

8 The following message appears.

8 Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.

5.1.5 I/O module editing

The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described below.

(1) Startup

[Operation]
0 Select [MODULE] (I’0 module) from the edit menu.

8 The following Ii0 module edit screen appears. (Fig. 5.15)

!ADDRESSCROI'P
BASE SLOT WAVE ADDRESSCROUPBASE SLOT WE

X0000 ID16C soooo


SOOOl i i it ID16C ~0001
X000? YOOOZ
: x0003 PO003
s0004 \0004
X0005 YOOO5
, X0006 YOOO6
x0007 YOOOi
\OOOE YOOOB
X0009 YOOOD
x0010 YOOIO
so011 YOOII
X001? YOOI?
\0013 10013
so014 \0011
SO015 10015

l!iEAXCH
?Ihpt"l3 HELP 1 5 606LETE7DELAi.L
8 5, 10 END

Fig. 51.5 (a) I’0 Module Edit Screen

l-70
5. OPERATION

x0000 0
'WOOi 0 i 00 :: \oooo
YOOQl
\ooc2
\0003 ; ! :: If
1: \ 0002
1 0003
\000: YOOO4
yoo~ 0 0 01 :I F0005
FOO06
YOOCi
%’
sooo~ YOOOS
10009
coo10 YOOlO
~0011 10011
\OO!? YOOl?
xooi3 YOO13
\OOl? YOOi4
.\OOlI YOOl5

1WKH ?IXPoT 3’BELP 4PKCB 5!4XLUlGDELETE


iDEL%L8DK’C-i 9. IO’mB,

Fig. 51.5 (b) Ii0 Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one channel can be set)

(2) Channel switching (only for models in which more than one channel can be set)

(i) To switch to the next channel:

[Operation]
0 Select (NXT.CH].

(ii) To switch to the previous channel:

[Operation]
ci! Select [PRV.CH].

(3) Setting

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.

Key in the module address in the following format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

(Note 1) The module name that can be specified may vary depending on the model of the PMC
or I’0 unit. Selecting [HELP] or pressing the <HELP> key can display the module
names that can be displayed in the NAME field.

(Note 2) The I,0 unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows:


“GROUP” : Specify a group number in the configuration.
“BASE” : Must be fixed at ‘0’.
“SLOT” : Specify the unit number of the PO Unit-B. Alternatively. set to ‘0’ if
power ONjOFF information ‘##’ is to be allocated.

l-71
5. OPERATION

(4) Deletion [DELETE] [DELALL) [DEL.CH]

(i) To delete one module:

‘[Operation J
@ Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be deleted.

0 Select [DELETE].

(ii) To delete all modules:

[Operation] ” +
0 Select [ DELALL].

(iii) To delete the modules of one channel (for models in which more than one channel can be
set):

[Operation 1
@ Select a channel for deletion.

8 Select (DEL.CH].

(5) Search [SEARCH]

[Operation]
@ Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified.

8 Place the cursor at the specified address.

(6) END [END]

[Operation]
On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.

The following message appears.

/I

Select one of the above items. and return to the edit menu.

l-72
5. OPERATION

(7) Termination [END]

[Operation]
0 Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.

@ The following message appears.

Fl Update
F2 Quit
F-3 Edit

@ Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing screen.

5.1.6 System parameter editing

(1) Start

[Operation]
0 Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editing menu.

G3 The system parameter editing screen appears.


The screen shown below is the system parameter editing screen for PMC-FIB. For each
PMC model, see item (4) below.

(2) Input

[Operation]
(J,) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 7 and < 1 > keys

Q Enter data

For information about Input items, see Item (4) below

1-73
5. OPERATION

(3) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END] or press < ESC > on the editing screen.

@ The following message appears:

II

@ Select a function key from the above. The screen display returns to the editing menu.

(4) System parameter editing screen and input items for each PMC model

(a) PMC-L/M

[Editing screen]
0 PMC-L

S:i,%;O:
s)
81 11
0- !Xo
j) BCD ?-DIGITAREA OBYTE ( 0- 400
)

F'!KTYPE = L
R-AREA 0

l-74
5. OPERATION

3 TIMER USED AREA (area used for timers1


When timers are set with the TMR function instruction on the CRT/MDI, setting and
display in BCD is possible.
This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area that can be set and displayed in
decimal format. This area is allocated from the start (D300) of nonvolatile memory.
This area must be specified in the TMR instruction parameter of timer control data
address to enable decimal display.
A timer control data address requires five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be set
as follows:

@ COUNTER USED AREA (area used for counters)


When the preset values of counters are set with the CTR function instruction on the
CRT/MDI, setting and display in BCD is possible.
This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area to use for decimal setting and
display. This area is allocated after the TIMER USED AREA in nonvolatile memory.
This area must be specified in the CTR instruction parameter of counter control data
address to allow decimal display.
A counter control data address requires five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be
set as follows:

(Number of counters for decimal display) x 5 bytes

@ BCD 4-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq/disolav in four-diait BCD)


This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses that can
be set and displayed on the screen (CRTIMDI) in 4-digit BCD. This area is allocated
after the COUNTER USED AREA in nonvolatile memory.
Two bytes are required for four-digit BCD display. Therefore, this parameter must be
set as follows:

(Number of addresses for 4-digit BCD display) x 2 bytes

@ BCD 2-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq and disolavinq in two-diait BCDl
This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses that can
be set and displayed on the screen (CRTIMDI) in two-digit BCD. This area is allocated
after the BCD 4-DIGIT AREA in nonvolatile memory.
One byte is required for two-digit BCD display. Therefore, this parameter must be set
as follows:

l-76
5. OPERATION

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)


This parameter sets an incremental processing time for the first and second ladder
levels. This setting reduces ladder scan time, thus achieving high-speed ladder
execution.
Note, however, that increased ladder execution time on the first and second levels
reduces ladder processing time on the third level.

Initial value 100 Setting range 100 to 200

CYCLE TIME
This parameter specifies a sequence program execution period of 16 or 8 ms.

Initial value 0 : 16 ms Setting 0: 16ms/l :8ms

Note, however, that this parameter cannot be set with PMC-L and PMC-M (MMC);
PMC-L is always set to 16 ms, and PMC-M (MMC) is always set to 8 ms.

IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division method)


This parameter specifies whether to use the ladder division method or non-division
method.
Note that when the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not
executed.

IInitial value 0 : Division method Setting 0 : NO (division method)


1 : YES (non-division method) I

(b) PMC-P

[Editing screen]

l-77
5. OPERATION

[input item]
@I PMC PARAM. SIZE (0 address size]
This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of nonvolatile memory in the common
nonvolatile memory (0 address) and internal relay (R address) area.

Initial value 2048 Setting range 0 to 2048

In the initial state, no internal relay (R address) can be used. Be sure to specify this
input item when using an internal relay.

(c) PMC-N/N (I/O LINK)/OA

[Editing screen]
@ PMC-N/N (I/O LINK)

P!iZ TYPE = K (I/O LI!Xx)

@ PMC’QA

I EDIT iSWEll PAitIWMER~

4050 series
( O:BICARF.l:BCD
\
10::; 100 - 150s

1 0.W. 1:YES
0:

PUC TYPE j PA

l-78
5. OPERATION

[Input item]
COUNTER DATA TYPE
This parameter specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR
function instruction is to be binary or BCD.

initial value 0 : BINARY Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)


This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for the first and second ladder
levels. This setting reduces ladder scan time, thus achieving high-speed ladder
execution.

Initial value 100 Setting range 100 to 150

The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an execution period of 8
ms.

I Setting 1 First and second level processing time

100%
150% 1 ~~~~ 5ms
7.5ms

Note, however, that increased ladder execution time on the first and second levels
reduces the following processing times:
l PMC screen display time
l CPASCAL processing time
l Ladder processing time on the third level

PASCAL EXEC (PASCAL execution time)


This parameter specifies the ratio of C/PASCAL execution time to ladder program
execution time.
In contrast to LADDER EXEC, this parameter reduces ladder processing time on the
first and second levels, and increases processing time for PASCAL and similar
processing.

r Initial value 0 I Setting range 0 to 100 I

PASCAL EXEC RATIO (ratio of PASCAL processino time to PMC screen processin@
The initial setting gives the same priority to C/PASCAL processing and PMC screen
display. This parameter allocates processing time to the following:
l PMC screen display time
l C/PASCAL processing time
l Ladder processing time on the third level
Under this setting, PASCAL can run periodically even during PMC screen display.

l-79
5. OPERATION

rInitial value 50 1Setting range 0 to 99 I

When 0% is specified, C/PASCAL is executed after PMC screen display.


Note that if a much greater value is specified in this parameter, the time allocated to
PMC screen display is too short, resulting in a delayed display.

8 PASCAL ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the start address .of the task control block (TCB) of a PASCAL
program.

Initial value 000000 Setting range Address in the PASCAL area


I

When there is no PASCAL program, specify OOOOOOH.

@ PASCAL DATA ORIGIN


This parameter specifies the start address (physical address) of the data area for a
PASCAL program.

Initial value 000000 Setting range Address in the PASCAL area


I

When OOOOOOH is set in the PASCAL DATA ORIGIN parameter, %FF4000H (or
sb800000H when an optional RAM is used) is assumed as the address.

@ SYNCHRONIZED LEVEL 3 (third-level svnchronization)


This parameter specifies whether to allow the synchronous buffer to be used in level 3.

Initial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO / 1 : YES

@I PMUOS EDITION fmanaaement software edition)


This parameter specifies the edition of the management software used with PMC-N.

Initial value 01 Setting Edition of the management software currently used

l-80
5. OPERATION

The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an execution period of 8
ms.

Setting First and second level processing time

100% 5ms
150% 7.5ms

Note, however, that increased ladder execution time on the first and second levels
reduces the following processing times:
l PMC screen display time
l Language program processing time
l Ladder processing time on the third level

@ IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division method)


This parameter specifies whether to use the ladder division method or non-division
method.
Note that when the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not
executed.

I Initial value 0 : Division method Setting 0 : NO (division


1 : YES (non-division
method)
method) I

@ LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO


As the language program and PMC screen display have the same priority, this
parameter specifies the percentage of the following processing times:
l PMC screen display time
l Language program processing time
l Processing time of third-level Ladder program
While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be executed cyclically.

llnitial value 50 1Setting range 0 to 99

@ LANGUAGE ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a
language program.

Initial value 000000 Setting range Address in the language program storage
area

When there is no language program, specify OOOOOOH.

1-83
5. OPERATION

@ OPERATOR PANEL (connectinq an FO machine operator’s oanel)


This parameter specifies whether a machine operator’s panel is used with the FSO.
When YES is specified in this parameter, specify the Dt’DO addresses where the
operator’s panel is actually connected, an address for key images transferred from the
operator’s panel, and an addresses for LED images transferred to the operator’s panel.

Initial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO i 1 : YES


I

0 KEY DI ADDRESS
.- Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external Dl where the operator’s
panel’ is actually connected.
,,

Setting range X0 to Xl 27, Xl 000 to Xl 019

ii) KEY DO ADDRESS


Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO where the operator’s
panel is actually connected.

Setting range YO to Y127, YlOOO to Y1014

iii) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS


Specify the start address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user
programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS


Specify the start address (PMC address) of LED images referenced by user
programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

l-84
5. OPERATION

5.2 Printout

A sequence program can be printed out. When PC9801 is used, PRINT.SYS must be installed
beforehand. Install PRINT.SYS according to Section 2.1 .l.
For printout, FAPT LADDER allows the user to set the top margin, left margin, line spacing and
cross reference. For details on setting, see Section 1.4 of Part II.

l Compatible printers

This software is usable with the printers listed below.

NEC PC9801 I IBM PC/AT

NEC PR201H EPSON VP1000


EPSON VP1000 (Note)

(Note) To use an Epson VP1 000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification is required. For
details, see Section 1.4 of Part II.

(1) General flow of operation for printout

Select a source program - Make # LS file

[ EXEC] End -[ EXEC]


<Fl > <Fl>
v
Specify output item

Fig. 5.2 (a) Operation Flow and Screens

l-85
5. OPERATION

The step sequence diagram printing can be selected at PMC-RB4(STEP) 1 RC4(STEP).

:iliiiiliiiiiiiiiiii~~~pR~N~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ’ 4

C:FRC4-STEP
TITLE : @#I/YES1
SYSTEMPARAMETER : [!WYESl
SYMBOL& COMENT : WYESI
f mT;l;;
LADDER
DIAGRAM
: [OPTION]
Added -> ~~...-I ,um
: [OPTIONI
I/O UODULE : WYESI
MESSAGE : [Em/YES1
: [OPTION]
CROSSREFERENCE
LIST : [CWYESI
: [OPTION]
BIT ADDRESS
MAP : #tU/YESl

Fig. 5.2 (d) Printing menu

C:YRC4-STEP

.fil::l:i

FIO ( ESC 1 : END


11

Fig. 5.2 (e) Optional setting menu for step sequence diagram printing

1) PRINT UNIT
Select either only a specified sub-program or all sub-programs.
When selecting “MODULE”, specify the printing sub-program name to “MODULE NAME”.

2) SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER
Select either not printing / printing sub-program number which belongs to a step sequence
program.

l-87
5. OPERATION

(4) Output item setting

Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. More than one item can be
specified at a time. Some set items may not be displayed, depending on the model of the
PMC.

@ Specifying whether to output each data item


Whether to output each data item can be specified by placing the cursor on the desired
item on the output item select menu with the 7 or 1 key, then pressing the <RETURN>
key.

8 Specifying options
For data having optional items, place the cursor on the desired option, then press the
<RETURN > key. The screen for specifying the corresponding option will appear. After
entering the necessary value on that screen, press the < RETURN > key.

6 Detail of each data time


1) Title printing
The data of the title is printed.
2) Parameter printing
The data of the system parameters is printed.
3) Symbol printing
The symbol comment data is printed.
i) Option (symbol printing)
* The output range of symbol comments to be printed is specified. If “0” is
specified as the print end line number, printing continues up to the last line.
4) Ladder diagram printing
A ladder diagram is printed.
i) Option (ladder diagram printing)
* The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference of a ladder
diagram to be printed are specified.
* If a diagram is output as a list file, the unit of printout must be specified as a
module.
* If “0” is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified, printing
continues up to the last net.
. If a page break is specified, a page break is made in the ladder diagram at
every new file or subprogram.
* If a cross-reference is specified, the ladder diagram is accompanied with a
cross-reference. (Fig. 5.2 (c))
5) I’0 module printing
The I/O module data is printed.
6) Message printing
The message data is printed.
i) Option (message printing)
* The range of messages to be printed is specified.

l-88
5. OPERATION

. Print format specification


Either Japanese-language (Japanese-language input mode screen) or code
format (code input mode screen) is selected.
7) Cross-reference list printing
A cross-reference list is printed. (Fig. 5.2 (d))
i) Option (cross-reference list printing)
* When a cross-reference list is printed, a check is made for duplicate writing,
and the output range of addresses is specified. If a duplicate write check is
specified, a message is displayed for duplicate writing of a write coil and
duplicate use of a function instruction that uses a number (such as a timer and
counter). The range of output addresses can be specified according to the
following table.

Table 5.2 Cross-Reference List Address Specification


I I
Example of
Address specification mode Address to be output
keying in

ALL ALL All addresses

Initial letter of an address Y All addresses having a specified initial letter

Bit address R1.O Specified bit addresses only

Byte address x10 Specified byte addresses


(including bit addresses)

Address range I F10.0.F12.7 I All addresses in a specified range

X2.3.END All addresses after a specified address


(Note 1)

(Note 1) When an address specification is made, addresses are output in the sequence: X. Y,
F, G, R, A, C, K, D. T, variable address, P. In this example, therefore, Y and all
subsequent addresses are output.

8) List file printing


Data from a list file is printed.

Fig. 5.2(f) Example of Printout of a Ladder Fig. 52(g) Example of Printout with a
Diagram with Cross Reference Data Multiple coil Write Check Indication

l-89
5. OPERATION

Example of printout of step sequence diagram

(1) Printout example by “F2[SETUP]” (print menu)


c graphical mode printout > <ASCII mode printout >
.
Initial step ;* Sl t Initial step
: Pl
..
Transition + PlOO 4 Transition

Label c-L1 4 Label


q s210 l s210
PlOl : PlOl
e Divergence of selective c- Divergence of selective
P150 P160 sequence + P150 + P160 sequence
+-- Divergence of +- Divergence of
simultaneous . simultaneous
-h I
0 S211 0 S215 0 S217 sequence l S211 ’ S215 ’ S217 sequence
P151 P161 1 P165 : P151 : P161 : P165
+Convergence of . -Convergence of
P152 P162 simultaneous + P152 + P162 simultaneous
sequence . sequence
t t ~
0 S212 0 S216 Step l S212 ’ S216 - Step
P163 : P153 : P163

P164 + P154 + 164


f- Convergence of selective c- Convergence of selective
sequence sequence
Block step F;’ SlOOO 4 Block step
: P2000

+ P102

Jump ->Ll 4 Jump

(2) Printout example by “SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NONES]”


<Not print sub program number > <Print sub program number >

&IS1 - Sub program number


4- PlOO
c-L1
q s210
jG+G-j- P160

P160

l-90
5. OPERATION

(5) Specification of output forms

Specify the paper size and the type of printer forms.

[Operation ]
0 Select [SETUP] on the output item selection screen.

@ The forms selection screen appears (Fig. 5.2(h)).

:
I P!P\PER
SIZE / LADDERPRIST
10 INCH/ ASCII
* 10 PiCH/ GRAPHIC
15 INCH/ ASCII
15 IKCH/ GRAPHIC

Fig. 5.2(h) Forms Selection Screen

0 Current output form is indicated with *. To change the output format, move the cursor by
< t >orc J >andenter<RETURN>.

@I After selecting forms, select [END) to return to the output item selection screen.

(6) Start of printing

[Operation]
Select [PRINT] on the output item selection screen.

Printing is started: during printing, the indication “PRINTING IN PROGRESS” blinks on the
screen.

When printing ends, the indication “PRINTING IN PROGRESS” disappears. (To stop
printing halfway through, select [BREAK]: the screen display returns to the input program
specification screen.)

(7) Termination

[Operation]

l-92
5. OPERATION

$ Select [END] on the input program specification screen or the output item selection
screen.

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(8) [LIST] command (F2 KEY)

It is the same function as “53.1 The List of source program”.


refer to above paragraph.

Note) If the step sequence function is selected when setting a model, the function for printing
a diagram according to a specified control statement (file with extension .#LS) is not
supported. The [LIST] command for creating a control statement is not included in the
displayed function key menu and cannot be executed.

(9) The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a model

1) Net Numbers
When a ladder diagram is edited, net numbers starting from 1 are assigned to
subprograms. When a ladder diagram is printed, sequential numbers are assigned to all
subprograms in ascending order of subprogram numbers.

2) Cross Reference
A cross reference can only include information referenced by the ladder, first, second, or
third level, or by ladder subprograms. If ladder subprogram PO001 is referenced only by a
step sequence subprogram, and if address PO001 is specified to print the cross reference,
there is “no reference information.”

3) Printing the Step Sequence Diagram


The step sequence diagram cannot be printed.

l-93
5. OPERATION

5.3 Compilation

During compilation, an edited source program is translated into a ROM format file (object file)
executable by the PMC. Uncompiled programs cannot be transferred to the ROM writers (PMC
writer or FA writer) or RAM for the PMC. With PMC-R series, PMC-QC, PMC-NB. compilation can
be performed in one of two modes: normal mode and condensed mode.

Transferred to the ROM writers


$$g - = - @ - andPMC

l Condensed mode

With PMC-R series, PMC-CC, PMC-NB, a source program can be compiled in condensed
mode. When a ladder with the same number of steps is compiled in condensed mode, the
size of the created ROM format file is smaller than that created in normal mode. As a result,
condensed mode has the advantages listed below.

@ A larger C language area can be allocated.

Normal mode Condensed mode

Ladder
ROM format file

C
language

0 Time required for compilation is reduced.

0 Time required for transfer from the personal computer to the PMC is reduced.

@ A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.

l-94
5. OPERATION

On the other hand, condensed mode has the restrictions described below.

0 Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur when instructions, symbols,
comments, and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated by compilation in
condensed mode is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built-in editing function. In
this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible overlap between the ladder area and
C language area.

ROM format file

Overlap (A C language program


1
map change is required.)

language 1

8 A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode cannot be compared with
a ROM format file generated by compilation in normal mode.

5.3.1 Operation

(1) Start

[Operation]
a Select [COMPILJ (compile) from the main menu.

8 The compile screen appears (Fig. 5.3).

Compile ~~~J@.-p>y<y?$y@gQ
\.i\.\ \.._,.,\

SourceProgramname : A:YFLYiIATAYTEST
/
ROW formatfile name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST.tEl

Series Edilion &chine toolname !

VC L PUC name Programeno.


/

~--- -

Fig. 5.3 (a) Compile Screen

l-95
5. OPERATION

l General Flow of Operation for compiling

I Main menu I

!$yg fi’e’
Make#LS
Main menu

Fig. 5.3 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens

(2) Compiling

.- (a) Normal mode

When PMCPAljPA3 is used, selecting [EXEC] causes programs to compiled in the


condense mode.

[Operation]
@ Specify a source program name and ROM format file name. The ROM format file
name must conform to the MS-DOS specifications.

@ Select (EXEC].
Note) For PMC-PAlIPA3. compilation in condensed mode is done by [EXEC].

Q Compilation is performed in the normal mode.

@ When the compiler terminates normally, memory map information is output. When the
compiler terminates abnormally, an error message is output.

(b) Condensed mode

Compilation in condensed mode can only be performed with PMC-R series!PMC-QC’PMC-


NB.

[Operation]
0 Specify a source program name and ROM format file name. The ROM format file
name must conform to the MS-DOS speciftcations.

8 Select [CONDNS]

Q Compilation is performed in condensed mode.

l-96
5. OPERATION

9 When the compiler terminates normally, memory map information is output. When the
compiler terminates abnormally, an error message is output.

(3) Output of compiling result

The results of compilation are output to the screen displayed by [ERROR](F3 key) and to the
following text files, irrespective of whether an error or warning has been issued. If many errors
occur, it is convenient to print out pr check the error fife with the text editor.

1) If the step sequence function is selected when setting a model, and if the following sample
source program is edited, the error and warning messages are output to the following file.

- Error file name = “TEST.ERR”(depending on the source program)


- Output directory = “A: Y FLY DATA% ”

Compiler RCBGTEP
SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAWFCY 1
source program name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST
ROM format file name : A:YFLYDATAfTEST.
#EX
Series Edition Machine tool name
NC& PMCname Program no.

2) In other case than 1) above, the error and warning messages are output to the following
file.

- Error file name = “FLMNE.ERR”(fixed name)


- Output directory = “in which the FAPT LADDER system is stored”

(4) Termination

[Operation]
3 Select [END).

C?9 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

l-97
5. OPERATION

(5) Specification of the input program name

(a) Specification of the input program name

It is possible to specify the extension of its input program name as following 3 types.
(Please refer to “1.1.2 compilation function” about #LS.)
* #LS * #CN * No extension

l Specify the file WITH its extension


It is possible to select the file name with its extension for the #LS-file and the source
program file.

Example for the #LS-file.


TESTDATA.#LS
File name -

Example for the source program file.


TESTDATA.#CN
File name -

l Specify the file WITHOUT its extension


In case of there are some same file names (without its extension) for the #LS-file and
the source file, target file is selected by system.
The order of priority for the target file specification is shown below.
1 The #LS-file
2 The source program file
In case of inputting the source program file, please select the file name with its
extension.

(b) Changing the file name after using “the making # LS file”

In case of after using “the making # LS file” function with #LS-file, the input program name
is changed to the LS-file name with its extension.

(6) [LIST] Command (F4 KEY)

It is possible to use following functions by [LIST].


1) The list of source program indications
2) Making “.#ls”-file

The “.#ls”-file name which is made by [LIST] function. is set into the space for source program
name.
Refer to next page about the details of above mentioned.

l-98
5. OPERATION

Note) If the step sequence function is selected when setting a model, the link compile
function specified by the control statement,“file with extension .#LS”, is not used. The
[LIST] command, used to create a control statement, is not included in the function key
menu and cannot be executed.

(7) Indications of compilation result

MAIN.#LS c Specified source program name


##### PASS1 ###I# +-Compilation result PASS 1
B:rb FLADDERY RC3ab MAIN -Source program name
B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ I-STEP (“MAIN.#LS”)
B: Y FLADDERS' MODULE+ SUBPl
B:a( FLADDERY MODULEY SUBPZ
B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ END-STEP
####t PASS2 ##### tcompilation result PASS 2
B:Y FLADDERY RC3Y MAIN
B:M FLADDERY RC3Y l-STEP
B: + FLADDERY MODULE+ SUBPl
Error end 20 (00111 Net ) - Relative net
B: Y FLADDERY MODULEM SUBPZ number in
Error end 31 (00001 Net ) each
B:Y FLADDERY RC3M END-STEP program
compile completed error count=00002 warning count =OOOOO

PASS 1: Convert to object


PASS 2: Syntax check

5.3.2 Password set function


(PMGRAl/RA3/RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2)

This function is supported only in the FS16/18/21 -B.


It enables a password to be added during compilation.
The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited on the
CRT:MDI. To discompile a ladder program guarded with a password, it is necessary to enter the
password correctly.

(a) Password types


There are two password types.
Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Type Use

Password (R) Password to allow display on the FSlG-B

Password (R/W) Password to allow display and editing on the FSlG-B


I

l-99
5. OPERATION

(b) How to specify use of a password


To use a password, set as follows:

0 Open the initial set file (%%%FLSET.CNF), using a commercially available editor.

: FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File


:
; Text Editor
:
lS:
editor =;
rpl_dha =$;
ladkey ‘1;
password=O; 0:No password
: 1:Password (R/W) and (R)
: t 2:Password (R/W)
j-1 3:Password (RI

:
*tJ;

@ Specify whether to use a password and the type of a password (when used) after
password = .

Value Password type

0 No password is used.

1 Both password types R and RW are used.

2 Password type RW is used.

3 Password type R is used.

(cl Password setting (compile)

Q When password = 0 + Gotoo.

When password = 1. 2, or 3:
After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify
whether to use a password.

IDo you enter password? (Y/N) I

To set a password. press Y + If password = 1 or 3, go to 0.


cl
If password = 2, go to @.
If it is unnecessary to set a password, press N + Go to @.
cl

l-100
5. OPERATION

@ The password (R) set screen appears.

Enter password (R)

@ Enter a password.
. A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and.;or numerals.
* Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other. (If a lowercase
letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)
* It is impossible to use space, kana. kanji, and special characters (such as l
, #, and @).
. Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed.
In such a case, use another character string.
* An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
* If the <RETURN> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a
password is not specified. -, If password = 1, go to @.
If password = 3, go to @.
* When <ESC> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued.
-+ GotoO.

@ The password configuration screen appears.

Verification (R) I

0 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your
password was entered correctly.
* When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is
accepted.
. When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
- When <ESC> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued.
+ Go tom.
If password = 3 is specified. + Go to@.

@ The password (R#V) set screen appears.

Enter password (R/W)

0 Enter a password (R/W).


- A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and!or numerals.
. Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other. (If a lowercase
letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)
. It is impossible to use space. kana. kanji. and special characters (such as *, #, and @).
. Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed.
In such a case, use another character string.

1- 101
5. OPERATION

. An entered password is not displayed on the screen.


1 If the <RETURN> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a
password is not specified. + Go to@.
- When c ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.
+ Go too.

@ The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification (R/W)

@ You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your
password was entered correctly.
- When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is
accepted.
- When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed.
.You are allowed to retry entering twice.
- When -z ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.
-+ Go to@.

@ Compilation begins.

(d) Password entry (discompile)


To discompile a password-protected ROM format file, it is necessary to enter a password.

I Set password type I Password type to be entered

IBoth password types (R) and (R.W) Password type (R/w)

Password type (R/W) Password type (RMI)

Password type (R) Password type (R)

After discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screen appears

Enter password (R) -1 Note) If an RMI password has been set


up, “password (R.‘W)” is
displayed.

When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.


If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, and processing
discontinues.
(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)
When <ESC> is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected.

l-102
5. OPERATION

5.3.3 Changing the Order of Subprograms

When a program is compiled. the source program, subdivided intosubprograms, is converted to a


single ROM file. Within the ROM file, subprograms are arranged in ascending order of subprogram
numbers. The order in which subprograms are displayed on the edit screen of the built-in
programmer function of the PMC-RB4 or PMC-RC4 may be changed after the source program has
been uploaded to FAPT LADDER, decompiled, compiled, and downloaded.

5.3.4 It is possible to choose output data


(Symbol/Comment, Net comment) to ROM format file

Compile PMC-RB4 <O>[A:YFLYDATAfRB41

Sourceprogram name : A:YFLYDATAYRB4


ROM format file name : A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX

Output to ROM
formatfile
SYMBOL
ii COkHENT [F61 YES
NETCOMENT tF71 PO1NTERSONLY

Compile PMC-RB4 <O>[A:YFLYDATAFRB4;

Sourceprogramname : A:YFLYDATAYRB4
ROM formatfile name : A:fFLYDATAYRB4.
XEX

Compile normalend ~..:...:::::j:::...::~.


_..:.:..::.‘~
::::..::.
I:: :

compilecompleted error count = 000000 warningcount = 000000

1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 5 F, SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS g DOS 10 END

Fig. 53.4 (b) Compile end

l-103
5. OPERATION

(i) F6 [SYMBOL]
Select whether output or not output the symbol 8 comment data to ROM format file.
HoweverJhe symbols which can not be displayed on CRTiMDl (7bytes or more symbols)
and the coil comments assigned to them never output to ROM format file.

1) “YES”: (Default setting)


The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDl(Gbytes or less symbols) and the coil
comments assigned to them are output to ROM format file.
They can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

2) "NO" :
No symbofcomment is converted to ROM format file.
Any symbol and comment is not displayed on CRTIMDI.

(ii) F7 [NETCMT]
If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether ‘Net comment pointer’
(Note2) is output to ROM format file or not.

1) “POINTERS ONLY” : (Default setting)


To edit the ladder program by CNC built-in editor and decompile the data by FAPT
LADDER, select this setting.
However, ladder size gets larger because ‘Net comment pointer’ is output to ROM
format file.

2) "NO" :
Any ‘Net comment pointer” is not output to ROM format file. In this case, ladder size in
the ROM format file is saved.
However, decompile the ROM format file makes its net comment data information lost.

Note 1) This item is in effect for Source-format programs. At the compilation of FORMAT-B
source-program,this setting is ignored.

Note 2) Net comment has its own character information only in a source program on the
personal computer.
Compiled ROM format file does not include any net comment characters.
Only ‘Net comment pointer’( = information of net comment position.) can be
output to ROM format file as an functional instruction “NOP”.
This ‘Net comment pointer” helps to restore net comment date at decompiling the
ROM format file that is edited on CNC built-in editor and uploaded to FAPT
LADDER.

l-104
5. OPERATION

5.3.5 The list of source program

(a) The list of source program indications

The file (selected directory) appears.

(4 Making the #LS-file

Please select the source program, and then the #LS-file is registered.

(Note) It is impossible to resister by source program of different PMC type. Because error
occur on print out/compilation operation.

The sequence of making the #LS-file as following flow chart.

Select the list of source program

Display the list of source program


(The target file indications)

Select one of source program


(Register to #LS-file)

(1) Start

(a) Select [LIST] (< F2 > : Print out/< F4 > : Compilation)

(b) “The list of source program” screen appears

l The target file indications : Source program file indications. (Indicated directory)

Indications Meaning

.. Parent-directory
DIR Sub-directory
: xxx PMC type

l-105
5. OPERATION

l Selected file indications : Selected target file is indicated by absolute-pass.

F‘ig. 5.35 (1) The List of Source Program Screen

(2) Function key indications and selection

The list of source program functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below.

(a) [LIST1 1

EXEC CHANGE EXTEND DRIVE SEARCH END


I

1 (W 1 (c)

(b) [CHANGE] 1

DELETE INSERT CHANGE END

(c) [SEARCH) 5

TOP BOTTOM FILE PCTYPE END

1 (d)

(d) [PCTYPEJ 1

PREV NEXT END

l-106
5. OPERATION

(3) Making of #LS-file [EXEC]

The sequence for registration source program file to #LS-file is shown below.

1. Source file indications (The target file indications)


2. The cursor moves to the selection file
3. Push the <RETURN > key (Registration)
4. Changing of selected file (changing of the select file)
5. Select [EXEC] (Making of the #LS-file + End)

The #LS-file name is changed to the “1st registered file name .#LS”.
Each data (System parameter~TitleSymbol&comment:Message/lO module) is effective in the
1st registered file.

(4) The list of source program indications

(a) Changing of directory with drive [DRIVE]

Changing of “drive + directory” use [DRIVE] software key.


It is possible to change directory in the same directory by <cursor > keys.
The following message appears after push the [DRIVE].
’ INPUT DRIVE NAME, PLEASE '

Example
Specification of only drive
B:<RETURN> (Changing to B:)

Specification by absolute-path + drive


B:\DATA<RETURN> (Changing to B:\DATA)

(b) Changing of file extension [EXTEND]

[EXTEND] is used to change extension (A part of “ 5_” mark on Fig. 53.1 (2).
It is possible to indicate file name except source program by changing extension.
In case of there are some selected files, it is impossible to use this function.

Extension can be changed by [EXTEND]

Fig. 5.3.5 (2) A Part of Target File Indications

l-107
5. OPERATION

The following message appears after pushing the [EXTEND].


’ INPUT EXCHANGE EXTEND(MAX 3 CHA.) '

Result from specification

File indications (Without extension)

File name with specified extension

Searching for a ‘fle in the source file list [SEARCH]

Following functions to &arch in the source file list are available.

1. Searching for the first file [TOPI


2. Searching for the last file [BOTTOM]
3. Searching by file name [FILE]
4. Searching by PMC model [PCTYPE]

(4 Searching for the first file [TOP]

The cursor moves to the first file in the current directory.

lb) Searching for the last file [BOTTOM]

The cursor moves to the last file in the current directory.

w Searching by file name [FILE]

Type a filename followed by [FILE].


When specified file exists, the cursor moves to the specified file.
When specified file does not exist, an error message is displayed. And then, it is possible
to continue to search by pressing any key.
To terminates the search function, press < ESC > key or select [EXEC].

(4 Searching by PMC model (PCTYPE)

Type a PMC type, for example RC3, followed by [PCTYPE].


When files with specified PMC type exist, the cursor moves to the file. And then, it is
possible to select the file at th e cursor position by pressing <RETURN> key. And,
following operations are also allowed.
[PREV] searches backward for the previous occurrence of file with specified PMC type.
[NEXT] searches forward for the next occurrence of file with specified PMC type.
When no file with specified PMC type exrsts, an error message is displayed. And the, it is
possible to continue to search by pressing any key.
To terminates the search function, press < ESC z= key or select [ENDj.

l-108
5. OPERATION

(6) Changing the selected file list [CHANGE]

Following functions to change the list of selected files are available.

1. Deleting a file [DELETE]


2. Inserting a file [INSERT]

This operation is also used to move the cursor between the source file list area and selected
file list area.

(a) Deleting a file [DELETE]

A file at the cursor position is deleted. And, the files following the deleted file are shifted
one line upward on the display.

(b] Inserting a file [INSERT]

A blank line is inserted at the cursor position and then the cursor moves to the source file
list area.
By selecting a source file in the source file list area, the selected file is inserted at the
blank line and the cursor moves to the inserted file name.

(c] Terminates the changing of selected file list [END]/ < ESC >

Function to change the selected file list terminates.

(7) Terminating [END ]/ < ESC >

The source program listing function terminates. In this case no .#LS file is created.

5.3.6 DOS command

You can call MS-DOS shell from FAPT LADDER by pushing [DOS] key.
If you want to terminate this, key in the command as bellow at MS-DOS command line.

1 A:bEXIT 1

l-109
5. OPERATION

5.4 Decompilation

During decompilation, a ROM format file is translated into a source program that can be edited or
printed out.
Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is ROM format file data. Data in the
ROM format file cannot be edited or printed out. Such data must be decompiled before it can be
edited or printed out.

(Note) To discompile a password-protected ROM format file, it is necessary to enter a


password. (See Section 5.3.)

5.4.1 Operation

(1) Start

[Operation]
0 Select [DISCPL] (decompile) from the main menu.

8 The decompile screen appears (Fig. 5.4).

2,1: COUtiTER DATA TYPE


PMC.:OS SERIES : 405: SerieS ( O:BINARI’.l:BCD )
3) LADDER EXEC : 100% ( 100 - 150% 1
4, (UNUSED,
51 (UNUSED)
6~ (UNUSED ’
7’ (UNUSED’
8) SYNCHRONIZED LEVEL 3 : ( 0:NO. 1:YES )
I 9) P&Z/OS EDITION 0:

Fig. 5.4 Discompile Screen

(2) Decompiling

[Operation]
0 Specify a ROM format file name and source program name.

8 Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.

l-110
5. OPERATION

0 Decompilation is performed and memory map information is output.

@ When the decompiler terminates normally, the message “DECOMPILE TERMINATED


NORMALLY” is output. When the decompiler terminates abnormally, an error message is
output.

(3) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note 1) During decompilation, PASCAL and C language data is lost. After editing and
recompilation, link PASCAL and C language data again.
(Note 2) A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode can be decompiled
using the same operation. After editing, the source program can be recompiled in
condense moded, if necessary.

l-111
5. OPERATION

5.4.2 Outputting to split files

When the results of decompilation are output to a source program, they are split into units of
subprograms and output to different files. For details, see Section 9.1.

ROM program Source program

1
LEVEL1 #LA
Ladder 1st level

1
LEVEL2.#LA
Ladder 2nd level

1
LEVELB.#LA

- END3 (SUB 3) Ladder 3rd level

- SP (SUB 7

- SPE (SUB 72) v

1 *
- SP (SUB 71) PO02

- SPE (SUB 72) L

- SP (SUB

I- I
H END (SUB 64) 1-1 The END instruction is not included in
1 1
I I the source program.
The instruction is automatically added
when the program is compiled.

1-112
5. OPERATION

54.3 Converting a step sequence program according to the model

Usually, mnemonics are used to convert a ladder program according to the model.
However, a ROM file is used only when a step sequence program for the PMCRB4(STEP SEQ) is
converted for the PMCRC4(STEP SEQ.

[Procedure]
1) Compile the step sequence program for the PMCRB4(STEP SEQ) and create a ROM
program.
2) Set model PMC-RCI(STEP SEQ) for FAPT LADDER.
3) Select F4 (DECOMPILE) from the main menu.
4) Specify the ROM file created in step 1)above and decompile the program.

The program is converted. The step sequence program read into FAPT LADDER can be used for
the PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ.

5.4.4 Merge

In case the existent file is specified for output source program when decompiling, the existent
source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents of ROM data.
In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in ROM data with the SymboVCommnet in source
program by specifying the undermentioned function-key.

- When the used name is specified for source program

Decompile PMC-RB4 <O>[A:YFL%DATAYRB4 ]

ROM format file name : A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX


Source program name : A:yFLYDATAyRB4

OOutput to Source program


SYMBOL/COMMENT
MERGE [F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition [FS] SOURCE DATA(effective)

Specified source program already exists.


Overwrite 7 (Y/N)

1-113
5. OPERATION

(1) F4 [MERGE]
This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by “NO” or “YES”.

1) “NO” : (Default setting)


The existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the
contents of ROM data.
There is no display of “F5[SYNBOL)” in this condition.

2) “YES” :
The symbolkommnet in source program is merged with that in ROM data. As for the other
data except symbol/comment, ROM data is effective.
Just after this specification, F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed to specify which symbol
definition is effective, either in source program or in ROM data, when they are in conflict.

(2) F5 [SYMBOL]
F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when “YES” is specified for F4[SYMBOL].
This specification decides which symbol definition in either source program or ROM data is
effective when they are in conflict.

1) “SOURCE DATA” : (Default setting)


The symbol definition in source program is effective.

2) “ROM DATA”
The symbol definition in ROM data is effective.

l-114
5. OPERATION

(3) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR], and its result.

ROM format file

+-I- - Symbol/Comment data


ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx


R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

Source program
- Symbol/Comment data
ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA


Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

+a) The result of "MERGE = NO"


Source program
x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

tb) The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition = ROM data".
Source program
x0.0 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

tc) The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition=source program".


Source program
x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

l-115
5. OPERATION

5.5 Link

During linking, load modules created in the C language, PASCAL, or other language are linked with
a ROM format file. The C language can be used only with PMCNIRCIRC3iRC4/QCINB. and
PASCAL can be used only with PMC-N. Linking is not required when the C language, PASCAL, or
similar language is not used.

_ Transferred to the ROM writers


and PMC

(Note 1) The format of load modules varies between PMC-N and PMCRC/RC3/RC4:QC/NB.
However, linking with FAPT LADDER is the same.
(Note 2) This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer. In addition, with
this function, a ROM format file holding only ladder data, and C language or PASCAL
load modules can be separately transferred to and linked on the PMC (dotted line in
the figure below).

l C prooram development environment for PMC-N

- Personal computer l P-G


- FAPT LADDER FAPT PASCAL
C language source FANUC
distribution PASCAL load
1
1
library
ICM (compiler) 1
format
. . . . . . . . . _ ROM
file
LMB (linker)

LMT (converter)
ttt
1 Link
C language load module +
ROM format file with
C language/PASCAL
load modules linked

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .

r
PMC-N

Debug

1-116
5. OPERATION

l C oroqram development environment for PMC-RC (RC3!RCWQC!NB)

-Personal computer
Link control statement FAPT LADDER
creation tool

J
C language source Link control source
ROM format
J-Y file
iC286 (compiler) FANUC distribution

1 -library
BND386 (binder)
+
BLD386 (binder)
$_
0J386 (converter) Link _ ROM format file -
+ with C language

L:
Intel hexadecimal - HEX2SREC (Note) - -: load modules linked
load module

-:
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. *
II t
’ i I
r
PMC_RC
vv$ I

(Note) FAPT LADDER does not allow Intel hexadecimal load modules to be linked. Before link
operation, convert the file format by referring to the HEX2SREC User’s Manual.

l On the PMCRCIRC3IRC4IQC/NB, load modules created in the development languages


indicated above cannot be directly linked. Perform the below operation before linking. This
program is provided on the following floppy disk:

RBiRC Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J604 #JP) Edition 3.1 or later


(A08B-9201 -J604 #EN) Edition 3.1 or later
QC Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J605#JP) Edition 1.0 or later
(A08B-9201 -J605-#EN) Edition 1.0 or later
NB Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J606#JP) Edition 1.0 or later
(A08B-9201 -J606-#EN) Edition 1.0 or later

[Operation]
0 Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the MS-DOS prompt. Specify as follows:

A:\FLADDER\APPENDIX, HEXZSREC input-file-name output-file-name

8 Conversion is performed.

1-117
5. OPERATION

@ Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR command.

@ Specify an output file name (for example. SAMPLE.%) as the load module file name for
linking.

(Note) When the extension of an input file name is omitted, the extension “.HEX” is
assumed. Output is directed to a file with the same name but the extension is
changed to “SR.” The specification of the following files has the same effect in
input/output:
HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE.SR
HEX2SREC SAMPLE SAHPLE.SR
HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX
HEXZSREC SAMPLE

(1) Starting linking

(Operation]
@I Select [LINK] from the main menu.

8 The link screen appears (Fig. 5.5).

Load module file name : A:YDATAYC-MODULE. SR

ROM format file name : A:YDATAYSAMPLE. #EK

Series Edition Machine tool name

NC & PMC name Program no.

Fig. 5.5 Link Screen

(2) Linking

[Operation]
@ Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link. The load module file
name must conform to MS-DOS specifications. Here the load module file name should be
specified with its extension (--------. l**). For PMC-RC, specify an output program
name for HEX2SREC.

8 Select [EXEC].

1-118
5. OPERATION

a Linking is executed.

(3) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

5.6 Input/Output

There are three types of input/output operations, as described below.

1) ROM read/write operation by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer).


2) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.
3) Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette
Adapter or Handy File, respectively.

On the PC-9801 series PC, types 1) and 2) require RSDRV.SYS, which is an MS-DOS standard
device driver. Install it according to the description in Section 2.1.

[Operation]
0 Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit, and connect them via an RS232C
cable. (See Appendix 1.)
0 Before starting FAPT LADDER, make sure that RSDRVSYS has been installed.
0 Start FAPT LADDER.
@ Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.
@ The input/output menu appears.

1-119
5. OPERATION

Table 5.6 Baud Rate Setting

Input/output destination Baud rate setting (bps)

ROM writers 4800


(PMC WRITER, FA WRITER)

FANUC Series 0 (PMC-L/M!M (MMC)) 4800 (9600) (Note 1)

FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E (PMC-P) 4800 (9600) (Note 2)

FANUC Series 15 (PMC-N) 480019600 (Note 3)


FANUC Series 158 (PMC-NA)

FANUC Series 16/18!20 (PMC-R series) 4800/9600


FANUC Series 15B (PMC-NB)
FANUC F-D Mate mini (PMC-QC)
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D (PMCPAl/PA3)

(Note 1) In input/output operations with the FANUC Series 0. a transmission at 9600 bps is
possible only for downloading on the PMC LOADING screen. In this case, it is
necessary to make the settings of the CNC match those of the personal computer.
(Note 2) In input/output operations with the FANUC Power Mate MODEL-A/B/C/D, a
transmission at 9600 bps is possible only for uploading and comparison. In this
case, it is necessary to make the settings of the CNC match those of the personal
computer.
(Note 3) In input/output operations with the FANUC Series 15, transmissions at both 4800
and 9600 bps are possible. In this case, it is necessary to make the settings of the
CNC match those of the personal computer.

[Reference] I!0 port setting


FAPT LADDER sets up ports according to the values in the following data files.

1) PC9801 version : FLIO 98.DAT


2) IBM PC/AT version : FLIO-AT.DAT
-

These files are in text format. So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.

l-120
5. OPERATION

1) Contents of the FLl0_98DAT 2) Contents of the FLIO_AT.DAT


(effective data section only) (effective data section only)

DATA-BLOCK = IO-PORT-SET DATA-BLOCK = IO-PORT-SET

FA-WRITER = RO. 4800. B8, PN. S2, NONE PM&WRITER =COMl : 48, N. 8.2
PMC-WRITER = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE FA-WRITER =COMl : 48, N. 8. 2
PMC-L = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2. NONE PMC-L =COMl : 48, N. 8. 2
PMC-M =RO, 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE PMC-M =COM1:48.N,8.2
PMC-M (TT) = RO, 4800.88, PN. S2, NONE PMC-M (-IT) =COMl : 48, N, 8.2
PMC-M (AXIS) = RO. 4800.88, PN. S2. NONE PMC-M (AXIS) =COMl : 48, N, 8.2
PMC-MMC = RO, 4800, 88. PN. S2. NONE PMC-MMC =COMl : 48. N, 8, 2
PMC-MMC (AXIS) = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE PMC-MMC (AXIS) =COMI : 48. N, 8,2
PMC-N -RD. 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE PMC-N -COMl : 96, N. 8.2
PMC-P - RO, 4800, B8, PN, S2. NONE PMC-P =COMl : 48, N, 8,2
PMC-OA - RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE PMC-QA =COMl : 96, N, 8.2
PMC-M (I/O) = RO. 4800, B8, PN, S2, NONE PMC-M (l/O) =COMl : 48, N, 8.2
PMC-M (I/O, TT) =RO, 4800,88. PN. S2, NONE PMC-M (I/O, TT) =COMl : 48. N, 8,2
PMC-M (l/O, AXIS) = RO. 4800,88, PN, S2, NONE PMC-M (I/O, AXIS) =COtVll : 48, N, 8,2
PMC-N (l/O) = RO, 9600.88, PN, S2, NONE PMC-N (l/O) =COMl : 96, N, 8.2
PMC-RB = RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE PMC-RB -COMl : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RC = RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE PMC-RC =COMl : 96, N, 8,2
PMC-RAl = RO, 9600,68, PN, 52, NONE PMC-RAl =COMl : 96, N, 8.2
PMC-RAP = RO, 9600, 88, PN, S2, NONE PMC-RA2 =COMl : 96, N, 8,2
PMC-RBP = RO, 9600, 88. PN. S2, NONE PMC-RB2 =COMl : 96, N, 8,2
PMC-RA3 = RO, 9600. 88, PN, S2, NONE PMC-RA3 =COMl : 96. N, 8,2
PMC-RB3 = RO, 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE PMC-RB3 =COMl : 96. N, 8.2
PMC-RC3 = RO. 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE PMC-RC3 -COMl : 96. N, 8.2
PMC-PA1 = RO, 9600.88, PN, S2. NONE PMC-PA1 =COMl : 96, N, 8.2
PMC-PA3 = RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2. NONE PMC-PA3 =COMl : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-OC =RO. 9600, B8. PN. S2, NONE PMC-QC -COMl : 96, N. 8, 2
PMC-NB = RO. 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE PMC-NB = COMl : 96. N, 8,2
PMC-RB4 = RO, 9600,88, PN. S2. NONE PMC-RB4 =COMl : 96, N, 8.2
PMC-RC4 = RO, 9600, 88, PN. S2. NONE PMC-RC4 =COMl : 96, N. 8, 2
PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEC)) = Ro, 9600, B8. PN, S2, NONE PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEQ) =COMl : 96, N. 8, 2
PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEO) = RO, 9600,88. PN, S2. NONE PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEQ) =COMl : 96, N, 8.2

Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign ( =) : Device


Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in the format of each
SPEED/MODE command. Only the first parameter (port number) and second parameter (baud
rate) can be changed.

1 - 121
5. OPERATION

5.6.1 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

ROM format data is written to ROM installed in the PMC. For information on the setting of a
personal computer for I/O operation, see Section 5.6. ROMs which can be used depend on the
PMC model, as indicated in Table 56.1. When using the FA writer, place it in remote mode.

Table 5.6.1 ROMs Usable with Each PMC Model

PMC model Usable ROM

PMC-L/M 256K-bit ROM, 2 each (note 1)

PMC-N ROM cassette A, B, C, D, and E

PMC-RAl /RA2/RA3/RB lM-bit ROM

PMCRB2/RB3 lM-bit ROM/ROM module B (note 2)

PMC-RCIRC3 ROM module A, B, C, and D

PMC-QA ROM cassette A, B

(1) Read

[Operation]
0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [READ].

@ Enter the name of a ROM format file containing read data.

@I Read operation is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@ When read operation terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(2) Write

[Operation]
0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [WRITE].

8 Enter the name of a ROM format file to be written.

@ Writing is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

6 When writing terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

l-122
5. OPERATION

(3) Verification

[Operation]
0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [VERIFY].

@ Enter the name of a ROM format file to be verified.

@ Verification is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

8 When verification terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(4) Blank check

[Operation]
0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I10 menu screen.

8 Select [BLANK] (blank check).

(3 Enter the name of a ROM format file to check.

@I Blank checking is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@ When blank checking terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note 1) Input/output with ROM for PMC-UM


With PMC-UM, a high ROM is paired with a low ROM. When performing I/O to and
from ROM with an FA writer on a PMC-L/M, FAPT LADDER allows a pair of a high
ROM and low ROM to be processed concurrently. At this time, the < F2 > key can
be used to switch between the processing of a single ROM or the processing of a
pair of ROMs.

1 - 123
5. OPERATION

1st PAIR 2nd PAIR 3rd PAIR 4th PAIR

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
High side Low side

0 q 10clOClcl ,
PMC-L
PMC-M
0E2
OF2
OEl
OF1

Socket allocation for concurrent processing of pairs of ROMs with the FA writer

l Writinq
During concurrent writing, data can be written to a maximum of four pairs of ROMs.

l Readina and verification


During concurrent reading or verification, only one pair of ROMs can be handled at a time.
When two or more pairs are set, the ROMs with the smallest socket number are read or
verified.

(Note 2) When writing 1Mbit ROM for PMC-RB2 with FA writer, “ID ERROR” will be
displayed on FA writer. But writing terminates normally.
(Note 3) PMC-P, PA1IPA3, NB, QC do not transfer data to and from EPROM. (EPROM
cannot be installed in PMC-P, PAlIPA3, NB, QC.)

5.6.2 Transfer to and from PMC-L/M (FANUC Series 0)

Data can be transferrod to and from PMC-L/M. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal
computer for I/O operz.:lon.

- FAPT LADDER 1 )- FSO


Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps
Parameter No. 0060
PMC loading screen
I
11Download IL
4800 bps (fixed) (Note)
+I I/O (P-G) screen 1
I I

4800 bps (fixed) (Note)


II Upload Ib

4800 bps (fixed) (Note)


4 PO (P-G) screen 1
I 1

I I
FSO baud rate settinq

(Note) A ladder editing cassette is required for this operation.

1-124
5. OPERATION

SYSTEM P-MODEL G

PHC LOADING READ OR WRITE OR VERIFY

ADDRESS : OOOOH EXECUTING


DATA : OOH
i 1 [CANCEL] [ 11 II 1

Fig. 5.6.2 (a) PMC Load Screen Fig. 5.6.2 (b) l/O (P-G) Screen

(1) FSO baud rate setting

This setting functions only for download operation using the PMC load screen.

[Operation]
*O Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.

*Q A baud rate can be set by specifying the parameter as follows:

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

0060 PCLDB

PCLDB 0 : 4800 bps


1 : 9600 bps

*a After a parameter change, turn the power off then on again.

(2) Download

(a) Download (using the PMC load screen)

[Operation]
0 Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.

8 Select (DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

*@ Press c 1> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.


(Select (1) LOAD FROM I/O. The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(a) appears.)

Position the cursor on LOAD for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press
the <RETURN> key.

Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

1-125
5. OPERATION

(b) Download (operation using the l/O (P-G) screen)

[Operation]
@Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [DNLOADJ (download) on the PMC menu screen.

8 Enter a ROM format file name.

*@ Press < 5 > on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.
(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [l/O] and [P-G] in this order. (The screen shown in Fig.
5.6.2(b) appears.)

451 Position the cursor on EDIT for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press
the <RETURN> key.

@ Download operation is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING”


blinks.

@I When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(Note) During downloading to PMC-L/M, symbol and comment data is not transferred.

(3) Upload

[Operation]
0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

@ Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.

*a Press <5> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.


(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [VO] and [P-G] in this order. (The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)
appears.)

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

@ Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

Q When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

l-126
5. OPERATION

(4) Comparison

[Operation ]
@ Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

0 Select [COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.

43 Press <5> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.


(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [I/O] and [P-G] in this order. (The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)
appears.)

6 Enter a ROM format file name.

@ Comparison is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

B When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

C3 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note) In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an operation
on the CNC.

l-127
5. OPERATION

5.6.3 Transfer to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E)

Data can be transferred to and from PMC-P. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal
computer for 1’0 operation. To transfer data to and from PMC-P, some parameters need to be set
on the Power Mate. Set the parameters according to Item (1) below.

- FAPT LADDER . Power Mate-MODEL _


A/B/C/E
4800 bps (fixed)
1 Download // PMC loading screen
I
Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps
1 Parameter Nos. &0226 or &0227 J Diagnostic screen 1
1 Upload 1
Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps
Parameter Nos. &0226 or &0227
11 Comparison It 4 Diagnostic screen 1

Power Mate-MODEL A’BIC’E baud rate setting

(1) Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E setting

PMC-P needs to be made ready for 110 operation. The operation below is required on the Power
Mate.

[Operation ]
$0 Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.

*a Position the cursor on the I!0 parameter, then press < 0 > < INPUT > or < 1 > <INPUT >.
(Specify 0 or 1 in the I!0 parameter setting.)

*O Set the parameters as follows:

l When I!0 parameter settinq = 0

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

&0006 I-I-I-I-I-I-lOIll

&0009
I 1 _ _ - - 0 - 1
I

&0014 I 0
I _
I -
I _
I -
I -
I -
I -
I
&0226 I BRATEO I

BRATEO 1 0: 4800 bps


1 1 : 9600 bps

1-128
5. OPERATION

l When the I/O parameter settino = 1

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

II0006

a0010

&0014

8~0227 BRATEl
I

BRATEl 1 0: 4800 bps


1 1 : 9600 bps

(Note) The mark ‘-’ represents a parameter not associated with this function.

*@ After a parameter change, turn the power off and then on again.

(2) Download

[Operation]
0 Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.

8 Select [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

*@ Turn on power to the CNC while holding down < 0 > and <X/AXIS > at the same time.

*@ The indication “PMC LOADING” is output on the CRT screen of the CNC.

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

8 Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks, and the
address indication (ADDRESS =) counts up.

@ When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(Note) During downloading to PMC-P, symbol and comment data is not transferred.

(3) Upload

[Operation]
Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.

Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.

Enter a ROM format file name.

l-129
5. OPERATION

@I The indication “PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

*8 Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSIPARAM > twice to display the diagnostic
screen.

*@3 Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press <WRITE> while holding down < * >.

(?I Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks, and the
address indication (ADDRESS =) counts up. On the CNC, the indication “WRITE” blinks.

@ When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output. On the
CNC, the indication “WRITE” disappears.

(4) Comparison

[Operation]
0 Select ]PMC) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [COMPARJ (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

@I The indication “PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

*@ Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSPARAM > twice to display the diagnostic
screen.

*Q Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press C WRITE> while holding down < ’ >-

8 Comparison is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks, and the
address indication (ADDRESS =) counts up. On the CNC, the indication “WRITE” blinks.

@I When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output. On the
CNC, the indication “WRITE” disappears.

(5) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note) In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an operation
on the CNC.

l-130
5. OPERATION

5.6.4 Transfer to and from PMC-N/NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL A,


-MODEL B)

Data can be transferred to and from PMC-N. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal
computer for I/O operation. To transfer data to and from PMC-N, FS15 baud rate setting is
required. See Item (1) below.

- FAPT LADDER - FS15


Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps
[DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)]
1 Download b Title screen
I
Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps
fDATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)1
II Upload Ib I/O screen
I
Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps
[DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)]
1 Comparison b j110[

FS15 baud rate settinq

(1) FS15 baud rate setting

FS15 baud rate setting is required. On the FSl5, data can be transferred at either 9600 bps or
4800 bps. The baud rate setting on the personal computer needs to match the baud rate setting
on the FS15. Operation on the FS15 is described below.

[Operation]
*@ Press the < CNCIPMC > key.

*8 Press the soft keys [PCPRM] and [MODE] in this order.

*@ The following information is output on the CRT screen of the CNC:

PMC MODE
PMC DATA INITXALIZE OFF ON
DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE) 9600BPS 4800BPS
DATA TRANSFER TO RAMBOARD MANUAL AUTO
RAM ENABLE (PC DGN,EDIT) OFF ON
DATA TRANSFER RATE (AUX) 4800BPS 9600BPS

*@ Press the values of both DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE) and DATA TRANSFER
RATE (AUX) by moving the cursor and using soft keys.

1- 131
5. OPERATION

(2) Download

[Operation]
@ Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.

8 Select [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

*$! Press the <CNC/PMC> key of the CNC.

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [EDIT] and [TITLE] in this order.

61 Enter a ROM format file name.

@ Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

B When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(3) Upload

[Operation]
0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

@I Initialization is started and the indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” is output.

61 The indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” disappears. After a few seconds, the indication
“PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

*@ Press the <CNC!PMC> key of the CNC.

*8 Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS), [OUTPUT], [ALL], and [P-G] in this order.

@I Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@I When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(4) Comparison

IOperation]
0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.

1-132
5. OPERATION

0 Enter a ROM format file name.

@ Initialization is started and the indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” is output.

0 The indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” disappears. After a few seconds, the indication
“PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

*!I3 Press the < CNC’PMC > key of the CNC.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS], [OUTPUT], [ALL], and [P-G] in this order.

@ Comparison iS executed. During operation, the indication “EXECIJTING” blinks.

@I When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note 1) In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an


operation on the CNC.
(Note 2) For FS15, it is possible UPLOAD, COMPARISON PMC program without PASCAL, C
LANGUAGE data.
In this case, please change (3 of each function as below.
*@I Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS], [OUTPUT], [LADDER], and [P-G] in
this order.

1-133
5. OPERATION

5.6.5 Input/Output for PMC-QA (FANUC SYSTEM F-MODEL D Mate)

Before PMC-CA and the ladder program are transmitted, the following (1) or (2) must be
performed.
Whether (1) or (2) is depended on the model of FD Mate.

(1) Setting of FD Mate PMC communicative utility FLEX OS version

(a) File configuration


The configuration of files in the floppy disk is as follows:

DRIVERS ACILOAD. BAT (Driver installation batch file)

--c FDM_SCD. DRV

C UTILS FDUTILS. 286 (Utility start file)

PGFD. 286

PGSV. 286

1 FDSV. 286

(b) Installing the driver


The driver must be installed only once when power to the main unit is turned on. After the
operating system starts, insert the floppy disk of external equipment input/output software
into drive A in the following example and enter the following commands.

FD Mate Main unit

To change drives 6 : >A-rReturnJ


A
A:>

To change directories A : >CD DRIVERS r Return J


A : DRIVERS/>

To install the driver A : DRIVERS > ACILOAD r Return J

Note 1) The underlined portions indicate data entered from the keyboard. r J
indicates soft key entry. Other portions are displayed by the system. Key entries
are not case sensitive. The following explanations are given in this format.
Note 2) Incorporate the RS-232-C serial driver into memory with a logical name (ser:).
(The system needs to be changed so that the serial drive is loaded with ser: when
the operating system is started.)
The following define statement must be entered from the keyboard according to the
driver version after the driver is installed.
define -s fanuc_ser = ON
In the above example, enter the following from the keyboard:
B: DRIVERS > define -s fanuc ser = ON

1-134
5. OPERATION

Starting the utility


The utility must be started whenever data is input or output between the PMC and the
external equipment.
In the following example, the floppy disk containing external equipment input/output
software is assumed to be inserted in drive B.

Procedure for Starting the Utility


FD Mate Main unit

To change drives A : >BA *r ReturnJ


B:>

To change directories B : > CD UTILS I- Return J


B : UTILS/>

To start the utility B : UTILS > FDUTILS r Return J

The screen display == = Utility main = = =


changes to the main ____----___-______-_____________________----

screen. (Main unit) 1 : PMC-----HO/F0


2 : PMC-----Device
3 : HDIFD---Device
4 : spare
0 : Quit

Enter the desired menu number and press the RETURN key. The numbers correspond to
the following processing.
1: Transmits data between the PMC and the HDI’FD.
2: Transmits data between the PMC and the external equipment (connected through
RS-232-C).
3: Transmits data between the HDiFD and the external equipment (connected through
RS-232-C).
4: This function is not currently used.
0: Terminates the utility.
Numbers other than the above are not accepted.
If an incorrect number is entered, delete the number with the BS or DEL key and enter the
desired number.

1 - 13s
5. OPERATION

(2) Setting the UNIX version of the F-D Mate PMC communication utilities

(a) File configuration


The configuration of utility files on the distribution floppy disk is as shown below.

UTILS FDUTILS (utility startup file)

FDSV

PGFD

F PGSV

(b) Driver installation and utility startup

Operation on the Main screen

(1) Create an appropriate directory on the # mkdir directorv-name r Return J


hard disk.

(2) Make the directory created in step (1) # cd directorv-name r Return J


current.

(3) Copy the utility software on the floppy # doscD A:IUTILS/FDUTILS . r Return J
disk (drive A) to the current directory. # doscD A:/UTILS/FDSV . r Return J
# doscp AYUTILS’PGFD . r Return J
# dosco AYUTILWPGSV . r Return J

(4) Make the copied files executable. # chmod +x * r Return J

(5) Specify a path. # PATH = $PATH:.;export PATH r Return J

(6) Start a utility. (Note) # FDUTILS r Return J

(Note) The method of using the UNIX version differs from that of the Flex version in the
following two points.
1. Filenames must be in lowercase letters.
2. ACILOAD is unnecessary.

1-136
5. OPERATION

(3) Preparing transmission in the main unit

Operation in the main unit 1

Enter 2 to display the === Utility main = = =


main screen. -----------------------------------------.------
1 : PMC -----HO/F0
2 : PMC-----Device
3 : HDIFD---Device
4 : spare
0 : Quit
------------------------------------------------
Select 3 : 2

Press any key other Press any key, to execute child program
than the control key. Press ESC key, if you stop it

The message on the Read/Write PMC data utility


Vight is displayed. ver. 1.00 -

Change to the PMC Press the CTRL + ALT + HOME, or MODE


screen key.

To stop this program, press the ESC key on the screen in the main unit. Then, the utility is
terminated and the following message appears:
End of child program
Press RETURN key, to go ahead
Pressing the RETURN key returns to the main screen in (c).

Note) If the CTRL + S key is pressed while the utility is running, the program stops. However,
pressing the CTRL+Q key restarts the program. Pressing any key other than the
(CTRL + Q) key while the program is stopped causes abnormal termination (hang-up).

l-137
5. OPERATION

(4) Down load

Operation in the F-D Mate main


Operation in the personal compu
unit:PMC

To start the utility 3 Start the utility. (See Subset.


in the main unit of 3.4.1.)
F-D Mate 3 Select PMC - Device.
Select 7 : 2

To put the @I Select [ PMCJ from the


personal input/output menu screen.
computer in the @ Select [DNLOAD] (download)
reception wait from the PMC menu screen.
status aEnter the name of the ROM
format file.
a Initialization begins, and the
message “INITIALIZE EXECUT
appears.

To output The screen display changes, and D Press MODE key or press
sequence data “PMC SIDE SET I/O DISPLAY, At CTRL + ALT + HOME key to
from the PMC KEY IN FILE NAME.” is displayed display the PMC screen.
D Press the IO key to display the IO
screen.
3 Press the FDCAS key to display
the FDCAS screen.
D Press the OUTPUT key to select
OUTPUT.
0, Press the LADDER key to select
LADDER.
YpPress the P-G key to select P-G.

4t transmission The EXECUTING turns on and off The displayed value indicating an
and the counter is displayed at tht address is counted.
bottom of the screen.

If transmission terminates normally, the personal computer displays “NORMAL END” and the
PMC displays OUTPUT COMPLETED.

1-138
5. OPERATION

(5) Upload

Operation in the F-D Mate main


Operation in the P-G Mate
unit/PMC

To start the utility 3 Start the utility. (See (3))


in the main unit of 3 Select PMC - Device.
F-D Mate Select ? : 2

To put PMC in 3 Press the MODE key or


the reception wait CTRL + ALT + HOME key to
status display the PMC screen.
9 Press the EDIT key to display the
EDIT screen.
9 Press the TITLE key to display the
TITLE screen.

To output @ Select [PMC] from the


sequence data input/output menu screen.
from the personal 0 Select [UPLOAD] (upload) from
computer the PMC menu screen.
@Enter the name of the ROM
format file.
@Initialization begins, and the
message “INITIALIZE EXECUTE”
appears.

At transmission The EXECUTING turns on and off, The displayed value indicating a size
and the counter is displayed at the s counted.
bottom of the screen.

If transmission terminates normally, the personal computer displays “NORMAL END” and the
PMC displays INPUT COMPLETED.

1-139
5. OPERATION

5.6.6 Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB/QC

Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C. In this case, personal computer port must be set.
See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal computer for I/O operation.

FS16/18/15B
- FAPT LADDER 1 -Power Mate-D, -
F-D Mate mini
9600 bps14800 bps
1 Download f w-1

9600 bps14800 bps


II Upload Ik PMC (I/O) screen

9600 bps/4800 bps


II Comparison II- PMC (I/O) screen

Baud rate settina for FSl6/18/15B, Power Mate-D, and F-D Mate mini

(1) Download

[Operation]
0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

$8 Press the <SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [l/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.

0 Enter a ROM format file name.

@ Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

8 When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(2) Upload

If the PMCRCRC3, -CC, or -NB is used, language data (C language) other than Ladder
programs can be used. When uploading or comparison is executed from one of these PMCs,
one of two data types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. LADDER and ALL have the
following meanings:

LADDER Sequence program only

ALL Sequence program and language data (C language)

l-140
5. OPERATION

Specify either data type in step 8 of the operation described below:

[Operation]
0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.

*a Press the <SYSTEM> key of the CNC.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], (IO], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

@ Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.

(?I Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@ When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(3) Comparison

[Operation]
0 Select [PMC] on the 11’0menu screen.

C!9 Select [COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.

*a Press the <SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [I/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

6) Comparison is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

8 When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation]
0 Select [END].

(21 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note) In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an operation
on the CNC.

l- 141
5. OPERATION

(5) CRT/MD1 and DPUMDI of the Power Mate-D

The NC of the Power Mate-D has the CRT/MD1 screen and the DPUMDI screen. When the
CRTlMDl screen is used, the procedures for data input/output are the same as those with the
PMC-R Series ((1) to (4) above). When the DPUMDI screen is used, the procedures for data
input/output are different from those with the PMC-R Series.
When the DPL/MDI screen is used, perform downloading, uploading, and comparison as
described below:

(a) Press the < DGNOS > key on the DPUMDI screen and select the diagnostic data screen.
03 Press the c READ> or c WRITE> key on the DPUMDI screen.
w Follow procedures (1) to (4) described above on the personal computer.

5.6.7 Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card

A ROM format file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to a memory card format file,
and output to a memory card via a memory card interface installed in the personal computer. The
PMC program on the memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory
card in the memory card interface in the CNC. By reversing the procedure, programs can be
transferred from the CNC RAM to the memory card.

5.6.7.1 PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]
Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

Compile a source program to create a ROM format file.

Return to the main menu, and select [l/O] (input/output) from it.

Select [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu.

F4 KEY : Handy File

F5 KEY : Memory card

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a) InputiOutput Menu

1-142
5. OPERATION

@ Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> memory card)).

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen

@ Convert the file from ROM format to memory card format.


Specify the following items for execution.
l Name of the ROM format file
Specify the ROM format file to be converted.
l Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the
CNC) to be created by conversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

l/O i TO UC :: &BP

WRITE (PROCRAWR - > Memory Card)

ROM FORMAT FILE NAME : A:YDATAAYSAMF’LE. llEX

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMPLE. XBF


(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (c) InputlOutput (to MC) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

l-143
5. OPERATION

0 The following two methods can be used to insert the memory card output in step @ into
the memory card interface in the CNC and read programs on the memory card.
0 Using the I/O function of the PMC
Specify M-CARD, READ, and the desired filename or file number at DEVICE,
FUNCTION, and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen, respectively. “7en press soft key
[EXECJ. Sequence programs are read from the memory card file created in step 0.

PMC 110 screen

PMCI/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP

CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = M-CARD
~;~~J..~~~Ij-j~;~= READ
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO. q

( #NAME )

I EXEC I [CANCEL]
[WRITE I[ READl[COMPARI

l Using the BOOT SYSTEM at power-on time


See Appendix 5.

5.6.7.2 PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

PMC programs are written to a memory card, using a memory card interface in the CNC. When
the memory card is inserted in a memory card interface in the personal computer, the PMC
programs on the memory card can be accessed as ordinary MS-DOS files.

[Operation]
0 Specify M-CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE,
FUNCTION, LADDER, and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft
key [EXEC]. Sequence programs are output to the memory.

l-144
5. OPERATION

PMC I/O screen

'PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP-

CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = M-CARD
;;i~iJJ#~;I;$&&= WRITE
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO. =
( #NAME )

[.EXEC 1 [CANCEL1 [WRITE 1 E READ 1 [COMPARI

The following
operationsare performed on the personal computer side.

Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

Select [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu. (See Fig. 5.6.7.1(a).)

Select [READ] (read (programmer C- memory card)). (See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b).)

Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step @ from memory card format
to ROM format by specifying the following items and running the utility.
l Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file written to the memory
card, and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted.
l Name of the ROM format file
Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data after conversion.

1.~3C FROM K ) ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

READ (PROCRAMER - > Memory Card)

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMF’LE. #RF


(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)

R&l FORMAT FILE NAME : A:YDATAYSMPlE. #EX

Fig. 5.6.7.2 (a) Input/Output (from MC) Screen

1 - 145
5. OPERATION

0 Discompile the ROM format file after conversion, and the resultant file will become able to
be edited on the personal computer.

5.6.7.3 Memory card input/output function (PMC-RAl) for the PMC of the
CNC (L/R) with loader control

This function writes a loader control sequence program to, or reads it from, the FANUC Series 16-
MODEL B with loader control. The loader control sequence program can be edited by specifying
the model as PMC-RAl.

(1) Writing (programmer - > memory card)


To write an L/R sequence program to a memory card, use the F8 key (L/R).
(The operations other than input/output with the memory card (such as editing) are the same
as those for the conventional PMC-RAl.)

[Operation]
Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

Select [INOUT] (input!output) from the main menu.

Select [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu.

Specify the names of the desired ROM format file and memory card file. (The memory
card filename is specified in the form of memory card drive + filename.)

Write to the memory card using the F8 key (L/R).

WRITE fPROCRMfE%! - > Memory Card)

ROM FORMAT FILE NAME : A:YDATAYSMfPLE. XEX

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMPLE. XBF


(Specify the MEWRY CARD drive)

Fig. 5.6.7.3 Input/Output (to MC) Screen (model supporting loader control)

(2) Reading (programmer < - memory card)


To read the loader control sequence program from the memory card, use the same operating
procedure as for the conventional PMC-RAl.

1-146
5. OPERATION

56.8 Handy File + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

If a ROM format file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy File format and output
to a 3.6” floppy disk (MS-DOS format), the PMC program can be read into the RAM of the CNC
via a Handy File interface connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.

5.6.8.1 PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]
Compile a source program, and create a ROM format file.

Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

Select [FDCAS] (FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy File) from the input/output
menu. (See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)

Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy File)).

IKI iFDCASi &B \\\m-

Fl KEY : WRITE (PAOCRAhSA --> Handy File)

F2 KEY : READ (PROCRMMR < - Handy File)

FlO KEY : ESD

Fig. 5.6.8.1 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen

Convert the ROM format file to Handy File format by specifying the following items and
running the utility.
l Name of the ROM format file
Specify the name of the ROM format file to be converted.
l Name of the Handy File format file
Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file (accessible by the Handy
File) to be generated by conversion, and the 3.5” disk drive to which the file is output;
5” floppy disk cannot be used.

l-147
5. OPERATION

'ARITE(PROCRAMER--> HandyFile:

FiM(FORMT FILE t&ME : A:YDATACSAAlNE.PEX

HandyFile FILE !iAME : C:YSAllF'LE.:SF


:Specif!the floppydisk drive!

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

@ Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5” floppy disk generated in step @ into
the Handy File.

5.6.8.2 PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

[Operation]
Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program to a 3.5” floppy disk (MS-
DOS format).

The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.

Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main unit.

Select [FDCAS] (FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy File) from the input/output
menu.

Select [READ] (read (programmer <- FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy File)).
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)

Convert the PMC program on a 3.5” floppy disk (Handy File format) generated in step 0 to
ROM format by specifying the following items and running the utility.
l Name of the Handy File format file
Specify the program name output in step 0, and the 3.5” floppy disk drive where the
floppy disk is inserted.
l Name of the ROM format file
Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data generated by conversion.

1-148
5. OPERATION

I.!0 ; FROM FDC.AS i :::wc-Rc3 _\\ 1: ~ .,@ux%wm .: ‘~_ \\\\,\...._ 1

READ (PROCRAWR <- Handy File !


Handy File FILE W.AME : C:YSAW’LE. :SF
(Specify the floppy disk drive,

ROM FORUAT FILE NAUE : A:YDATAYSAW’LE. PEX

Fig. 5.6.8.2 (a) Input/Output (from FDCAS) Screen

Discompile the ROM format file after conversion, and the resultant file will become able to
be edited on the personal computer.

5.6.9 FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER + 3.5” floppy disk (P-G format)

If a ROM format file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy File format and output
to a 3.6” floppy disk (P-G format), the PMC program can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a
FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.

(Caution]
There are two types of adapters for access to 3.5” floppy disk drives.

Name Specification number Accessible floppy disk type

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER Al 38-01 SO-BOO1 2HD

CASSETTE ADAPTER3 A13B-0131-8001 2DD

This function uses “P-G <- > MS-DOS format conversion” supported by FLPGMS. FLPGMS
does not support 200 floppy disks, so CASSETTE ADAPTER 3 cannot be used with FLPGMS.
Similarly, this function cannot be used on the IBM PC/AT, because it does not support “P-G <->
MS-DOS format conversion.”

1-149
5. OPERATION

5.7 Mnemonic Editing

57.1 Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file

A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor.

[Operation]
Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 5.7.1(a)).

1WiWW2SRCtXV3BAT&H 4 "5" 6 ,,V'. y,y:-< 8" ".;,,g"v ', ,O FJ@j-

Fig. 5.7.1(a) Mnemonic Menu Screen

Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).

The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 57.1 (b)).

1) SOURCEPROCRAMNAFe:

2) HMINIC FILE NW

3'(;ONEJ; DATA KIND SELECTION :

[ ; ; fW;M PARAWTER

( 3 : SYmiOL& CU)IEah"T

4) MODE : FUR P-G

l-150
5. OPERATION

@ Specify the following items:


l Source program name
Specify the name of the source program to be converted. Up to eight characters can
be specified. Never specify an extension for the name.
l Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of the mnemonic file to which a source program is converted. Up to
40 characters can be specified.
l Data conversion selection
Specify data files subject to conversion. All data files can be specified or specific data
files can be selected.
l Mode (setting item selection)
Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using the < t > and
< + > keys.

FOR- P-G P-G output format data is converted.


Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to code format (Note 2).

Japanese Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.


anguage Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
:omment (Note) format (Note 3).

WLL - OPTION Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.
Data including address symbols and comments, and function instruction
names treated as comments is converted.
Data including all instruction sections, operand sections, and comment
sections is converted.
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).

_ABELI Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of a function instruction
SUB-PROGRAM (JMPB, JMPC, CALL. SP, or another instruction) used in a sub-program is
highlighted. The step number of the converted mnemonic data does not
agree with other setting. (The function instruction section used in the sub-
program does not agree with the other setting.)
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).

(Note 1) The item specifying Japanese language comment conversion cannot be selected
on an IBM PC/AT.
(Note 2, 3) Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input mode screen during
message editing.

@ Select (EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

ci3 Source program is converted to a mnemonic file.

1 - 151
5. OPERATION

@I An error message is displayed if <RETURN > is pressed after conversion. The mnemonic
conversion screen appears when -z SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

5.7.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted to a source
program that can be edited with the personal computer version of FAPT LADDER.

[Operation]
0 Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

0 The mnemonic menu screen appears.

@ Select (SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program).

@I The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. 5.7.2).

: FoRP4

Fig. 5.7.2 Source Program Conversion Screen

61 Specify the following items:


l Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40 characters can be
specified.
0 Source program name
Specify the name of the source program to which a mnemonic file is to be converted.
Up to eight characters can be specified. Never specify an extension for the name.
l Mode (setting item selection)
Specify setting items. Select items from the table below using the < + > and < + >
keys.

(Note) The item specifying Japanese language comment conversion cannot be selected on an
IBM PC/AT.

1-152
5. OPERATION

@ Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

(?J Mnemonic file is converted to a source program.

@ An error message is displayed if c RETURN > is pressed after conversion. The source
program conversion screen appears when < SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

5.7.3 Mnemonic file format

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is to be converted to a source
program, the mnemonic file must be in the following format.

(a) Identification code

The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification codes that each begin with %.

ID code Description

O/o@A Beginning of ALL-format data


%@E End of ALL-format data
%@O to 5 Beginning of unit-format data
% only End of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.

PMC model
Unit-format data
L M N!NAKIA P I series/PAl/PA3/QC/NB/NB:

Parameter %@O TO@0 % @O % @O % @O


Title ~ %@l %@l %@l %@l %@l
Symbol & comment %@2 %@2 % @2 %@2 % @2
Ladder O/o@3 “/0@3 O/o@3 %@3 % @3
Message X X %@4 X % @4
l/O module X %@4 % @5 X O/o@5

(b) Linefeed code

Control character LF (OAH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control character CR (ODH) is


ignored.

(c) Reserved symbols


0 r;J This special character is reserved for use in ladder data.
l A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladder data from a
comment. Characters that follow a semicolon are treated as a comment.
When a mnemonic file is converted back to a source program, a semicolon and
a comment that follows it are not generated.

1-153
5. OPERATION

0 r:j This special character is reserved for use in ladder and I/O module data.
l A coton is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder
data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a net number.
l A colon is also used in the I/O module data section to separate a channel
number from 110 module data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a
channel number.

In case of PMCRB4!RB4(STEP SEQ/RB5.!RBG)/RC4’RC4(STEP SEQ NB2), mnemonic file has


below format.

%@A
r ID code (See 10.1)
%@2-c
R0200.0 UNIT 3 POWER Description of symbol
$1 ‘KEEP POWk?-ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’ II and comment (See 10.3)
R0200.1 UNIT 3 ACT
$1 ‘S’POWER$$’ - ‘KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$’ ON’
R0300.0 - Control character
$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON’ (See 10.2)
PO008 OPEN FRONT
$1 ‘OPEN FRONT COVER’
LO100 INITIALIZE
$1 ” ‘INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’
%
% @3

RD R1OO1.O
OR R120.3
AND R1000.2
WRT Y2000.4

1
(’ Description of net
Net comment is written in here. Any characters comment (See 10.4(l))
you enter by using personal computer is permitted.
3
RD R1OO1.O
AND R1000.2
WRT Y23.4
(*SP 3 Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)
RD R1O1.O (See 10.4(2))
OR R123.4
AND R100.2
WRT Y200.4
%
‘y

I% @E

Note) A mnemonic file converted with version 08.1 or earlier is able to be converted to source
program with version 08.4 or later.
But a mnemonic file converted with version 08.4 or later is not able to be converted to
source program with version 08.1 or earlier.

1-154
5. OPERATION

1) ID code
The ID code for symbol and comment data has been changed to “%@2-C”.
Another ID codes are not changed.

RB4’RB4 (STEP)‘RC4;RC4 (STEP)


Data kind
Ver. 08.4 or later Ver. 08.1 or earlier

System parameter % @O % @O
Title %@l %@l
Symbol/comment %@2-c % @2
Ladder % @a %@3
Message % @4 % (94
l/O module % @5 % @5

Note) For PMC-RB5!RBG/NB2 is Ver 08.5 or later.

2) Control character
The dollar character “S” is used as control character in the mnemonic file. Every dollar
character in the sentence must be described as “$$” in the mnemonic file.

3) Symbol and comment data

(1) Description of address and symbol


Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.
Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe after address data
with blank character or horizontal tabulation character as delimitter.

1 R0200.0 UNIT -- 3 POWER

(2) Description of relay comment and coil comment


Describe the relay comment and coil comment after address defined in (1).
The first string between two single quotation marks after mark “$1” is relay comment. And
next string between two single quotation marks is coil comment.

1 $1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’

Blank character or horizontal tabulation character


Mark of comment data line (only ‘$1’)

1-155
5. OPERATION

When relay comment is not used, a part of relay comment must be described by double
single quotation marks.

I $1 ” ‘INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

Note) Every single quotation mark in the relay comment and coil comment string must be
described as “$” + ‘*“I in the mnemonic file.

4) Ladder data

(1) Description of net comment


The net comment data is specified by ‘(* and ‘3’ characters.

(2) Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)


Designation of new page for ladder diagram printing must be described as “$P” or “$p” in
the mnemonic file.

Characters I Means

$P or $p Designation of new page


(for ladder diagram printing)

1-156
5. OPERATION

5.7.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

(a) Parameter

0 PMC-L

ce 0 1
1 4001 1. D address size (0 to 400 bytes)
2 01 2. Whether an operator’s panel is used (1: YES, 0: NO)

3 501 3. Size of the area used for timers (0 to 400 bytes)


4 301 4. Size of the area used for counters (0 to 400 bytes)
5 101 5. 4-digit BCD display address (0 to 400 bytes)
6 501 6. 2-digit BCD display address (0 to 400 bytes)
81
tEoB1

8 PMC-M!M (l/O LINK)/PMC-M (MMC)

se 0 1
1 3901 1. D address size (0 to 400 bytes)
2 11 2. Whether an operator’s panel is used (1: YES, 0: NO)
3 2001 3. Size of the area used for timers (0 to 400 bytes)
4 401 4. Size of the area used for counters (0 to 400 bytes)
5 201 5. 4-digit BCD display address (0 to 400 bytes)
6 101 6. 2-digit BCD display address (0 to 400 bytes)
7 1501 7. Ladder execution time (100 to 200%)
8 11 B. Ladder execution period (0: 16 ms, 1: 8 ms)
9 11 9. Division/non-division method (0: Division, 1: Non-division)
01
IEOBI

(Note) The parameter in Item 8 above (ladder execution period) is not applicable to PMC-M
(MMC).

0 PMC-P

ae 01
1 20481 1. D address size (0 to 2048 bytes)
%l
IEOBI

1-157
5. OPERATION

m
@ PMC-N/N (VO LINKRB4)

%@ 0 1
1 4040~ PMC Series (4040: N, 4045: N (I!‘0 LINK))
2 BINARY1 Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
3 SOS- PASCAL execution time (0 to 100%)
4 PC-N1 Setting not required (PC-N (fixed))
5 8000001 PASCAL TCB start address (0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal))
6 581 PASCAL PMC screen processing time ratio (0 to 99%)
7 0001 Ladder execution time (000 to 050%) (Note)
8 8100001 PASCAL data start address (0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal))
9 NOi Level-3 synchronization (NO: Asynchronous, YES: Synchronous)
10 041 10. PMC edition (PMC edition (2-digit))
sl
[EOBI (Note) Set a value subtracting 100 from an actual value for the
"7.Ladder execution time”.
(Example) When an actual value desired for the ladder execution
time is 125%, set 025 to that setting.

PMC-RAl !RA2IPAl /PA3’PB4RB4 (STED)/RB5/RBG

%@ 0 1
2 BINARY1 2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
3 No1 3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
4 PMC- RAll 14. PMC model (PMC-RAl/PMC-RA2’PMC

81 RB4iPMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) PMC-

[EOBI PAl/PMCPA3/PMCRB5/PMCRBG)

(Note) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify
the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image address as
follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

1-158
5. OPERATION

@ PMCRB,‘RB2RA3’RB3

se 0 1
2 BINARY1 2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
3 NO1 3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
4 PMC-RB1 4. PMC model (PMC-RB, PMCRB2 or PMC-RB)
7 1001 7. Ladder execution time (100% (fixed))
9 YES1 9. Division/non-division method (NO: Division, YES: Non-division)
01
[EOBI

(Note 1) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used),
specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image
address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

(Note 2) The parameter in Item 9 above (division/non-division method) is not applicable to


PMCRB2/RA3/RB3.

@ PMCRCIRC3iRC4IRC4 (STEP)

%e 0 1
2 BCDS. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
3 ND1
4 PMC-RCl PMC model (PMCRCRC3 (fixed)/PMC-RC4)

5 000000 Start address of language program link control statement data

7 100s. (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF


(hexadecimal))
9 NOi
81 Ladder execution time (1 to 150%)
Division/non-division method (NO: Division, YES: Non-division)
[EoBl

(Note 1) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used),
specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image
address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO5.

(Note 2) Parameter 9 “Divisioninon-division method” is not available for PMCRC3.

1-159
5. OPERATION

@I PMC-QC/NB:NB2

%@ 0 1
2 BCDJ 2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
3 NOS-
4 PHC-QCl 4. PMC model (PMC-QCPMC-NB!PMC-NB2)

5 000000 5. Start address of language program link control statement data


(0 or 200000 to PFFFFF
6 501
7 1001 (hexadecimal))

81 6. Percentage of language program execution time (1% to 99%)

fEoB1
7. Ladder execution time (Always 100%)

(Note) If YES is specified in item 3 (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify the
addresses of KEY, LED, KEY image, and LED image as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

lb) Title (common to all models)

%@ 11
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME 1
02 MACHINE TOOL NAMES
03 CNC 7 PMC NAMES
04 PMC PROGRAM NO.1
05 EDITION NO.1
06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.1
07 DATE OF PROGRAMING1
08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BYi
09 ROM WRITTEN BY1
10 REMARKS1
el
fEOB1

(c) Symbols and comments (common to all models)

%@ 2 1
x000.0 2PX.M START BELT CONVEYER 1
x000.1 2PY.M LIMIT SWITCH ON1
%l
(EOBJ

l-160
5. OPERATION

@ Symbols and comments (at using the expanded symbol function)

%@2-c 7 Symbol
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'
- Coil Comment
Relay comment
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT
$1 *$*P~wER$$' *KEEP UNIT-~ $$PowER$' 0~'
R0300.0 IControl code
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP INIT- POWER ON'
PO008 OPEN-FRONT
$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER'
LO100 INITIALIZE
$1 " 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'
- no Relay comment
%
[EOBI

(d) Ladder (common to all models)

0 FOR -- P G

%@ 31
RD X0.41
OR Y80.61
WRT DSOO.ll
SUB 11
RD. NOT X3.01
SUB 401
21
81911
03001
SUB 21
81
[EOBI

1 - 161
5. OPERATION

8 FULL- OPTION

%@3 1
NOOOOl: SUB 71 ; SP
Pl ;(SUBPRl ) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1
N00002: RD x0.0 ;(XADRSl ) [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl] 1
SUB 68 ; JMPBl
LlOO ;(LABELl ) [LABEL Looooi] 1
N00003: RD x0.1 ;(XADRS2 ) [JUMPB LABEL Looooi] J
SUB 73 ; JMPCl
LlOO ;(LABELl ) [LABEL Looooi] 1
N00004: RD x0.1 ;(XADRSZ ) [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl]l
SUB 65 ; CALL1
P2 ;(SPlOOO ) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOOO] 1
N00005: SUB 66 ; CALLU5.
P2 ;(SPlOOO ) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOOO]J
N00006: SUB 69 ; LBL 1
LlOO ;(LABEL~ 1 [LABEL LOOOO~] 1
YOOO07: SUB 72 ; SPE 1
VOOOOB: SUB 71 : -1
P2 ; (SPlOOO ) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.1000 11
YOOO09: RD RO.0 ;(RADRSOO ) 1
DEC DO ;(DADRS04 ) 1
21
WRT DO.0 1
300010: SUB 72 ; SPE 1
300011: SUB 64 ; END 1
I1

1-162
5. OPERATION

0 FULL-OPTION (at using the expanded symbol function)

%@3 1 Symbol
NOOOOl: SUB 71 ; SP [_, Relay comment

Pl ;(SUBPRl ) "SUB PROG. N0.01" 1


; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1
L-- Coil comment
N00002: RD x0.0 ;(XADRSl ) "JUMPB LABEL Lool" l-_-1
SUB 68 ; JMPBJ no Comment
LlOO ;(LABELl )l
no Relay comment
; [LABEL ~ooool] 1A
N00003: RD x0.1 ;(XADRSZ ) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"$
SUB 73 ; JMPCJ
LlOO ;(LABELl )l
; [LABEL ~00001 11
N00004: SUB 69 ; LBL 1
LlOO ;(LABELl )1
; [LABEL LOOOOlJ1
N00005: SUB 72 ; SPE 1
N00006: SUB 71 : -1
P2 ; (SPlOOO ) "SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l
N00007: RD RO.0 ;(RADRSOO ) 1
DEC DO ;(DADRSOII ) 1
21
WRT DO.0 1
N00008: SUB 72 ; SPE 1
N00009: SUB 64 ; END 1
81

1-163
5. OPERATION

@ LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

H3 1
;UBPRl SP 71 ;<Pl > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1
RD XADRSl :<Xo.o > [JIJMPBLABEL LOOOO1]1
JMPB LABEL1 :<LlOo > [LABEL Looool] 1
RD XADRSZ ;<Xo.l > [JUMPB LABEL ~ooool] 1
JMPC LABEL1 ;<Lloo > [LABEL L00001] 1
RD XADRSZ ;<Xo.l > [JUMPB LABEL Looool] 1
CALL SPlOOO :<P2 > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.looo]1
CALLU SPlOOO ;<P2 > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOoo] 1
LABEL1 LBL ;<LlOOO > [LABEL Looooi] 1
SPE 1
iPlOO0 SP ;<P2 > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOoo] 1
RD RADROO ;<RO.O ' 1
DEC DADR04 ;<DO ’ 1
21
WRT DO.0 1
SPE 1
END 1
1 1

6) LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM (at using the expanded symbol function)

%@3 1 I Address I Relay comment


SUBPRl SP SUBPRl :<Pl >. "SUB PROG. N0.01"
; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1
r Symbol - Coil comment

RD XADRSl ;<XO.o > 'JUMPB LABEL LOOl"1


JMPB LABEL1 ;<LlOO >l
; [LABEL Looooi] 1
RD XADRS2 ;<XO.l > "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"l
JMPC LABEL1 ;<LlOO > [LABEL Looool] 1
LABEL1 LBL ;<LlOOO >1
; [LABEL Looool] 1
SPE 1
SPlOOO SP ;<P2 > "SUB PROGRAM NO.l"l
RD RADROO ;<RO.O ' 1
DEC DADR04 ;<DO ' 1
21
WRT DO.0 1
SPE 1
END 1
% 1

1-164
5. OPERATION

(e) Message (other than PMC-L, PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/M (MMC), PMC-P)

re 4 1
A0 0. 0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE1
AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVA
L SIGNAL NOT ON1
AO0.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCR ONi
%l
[EOBI

(f1 I/O module (other than PMC-UP)

%@ 5 1
x000 1 0 1 ID64Al
YO08 1 0 4 OD64Bl

81
L [EOBI

(Note) The ID code depends on the model as follows:


. %@4 : PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/PMC-M (MMC)
0 %@5 : PMC-N/N (I/O LINK), PMC_RAl/RA2/RB/RB2/RC

1-165
5. OPERATION

5.7.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

(a) PMC-M

%@ A1
%@0 1
1 3901
2 11

8 11
9 11
el
ee 11
01 MACH INE TOOL BUILDER NAMES
02 MACH INE TOOL NAME1

09 ROM WRITTEN BYA


10 REMA RKSl
sl
%@ 2 1
x000.0 2PX.M START BELT CONVEYER 1
x000.1 2PY.M LIMIT SWITCH ONS.
%l
%@ 3 1
SUB 11
RD. NOT x3.01
SUB 401
21
81911
03005
SUB 21
SUB 481
%l
se 4 1
x000 1 0 1 ID64Al
YOO8 1 0 4 OD64Bl
%l
%@ E 1
[EOBI

1-166
5. OPERATION

PMC-N

1
%@ A1
%@0 1
1 sosol
2 BINARY1

9 NO1
10 041
%l
%@ 11
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1
02 MACHINE TOOL NAME1

09 ROM WRITTEN BY1


10 REMARKS1
sl
%@ 21
x000.0 2PX.M START BELT CONVEYER 1
x000.1 2PY.M LIMIT SWITCH ON1
sl
%@ 3 1
SUB 11
RD. NOT K3.01
SUB 401
21
81911
DO001
SUB 21
SUB 481
%l
%@ 4 1
AOO.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE1
AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVA
L SIGNAL NOT ON1
rl
%@ 51
x000 1 0 1 ID64Al
YOO8 1 0 4 OD64Bl
%l
%@ El
tEoB1

1-167
5. OPERATION

(cl PMC-FIB

%@ A 1
se 0 1
2 BCDJ.

3 NO1

7 1001
9 YES1
%l
%@11
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1
02 MACHINE TOOL NAME1

09 ROM WRITTEN BY' J


10 REMARKS1
%l
%@2 1
x000.0 ZPX.M START BELT CONVEYER 1
x000.1 ZPY.M LIMIT SWITCH 0 N 1
sl
oe 3 1
SUB 11
RD. NOT K3.01
SUB 401
21
81911
D3001
SUB 21
SUB 481
sl
%@4 1
AOO.0 2100020 ATC DOOR N OT CLOSE1
AOO.l 2101022 SPI NDLE SP EED ARRIVA
L SIGNAL NOT ONS.
%l
%@ 5 1
x000 1 0 1 ID16 cl
YOO8 1 0 4 OD32 Al
%l
%@ E 1
[EOBI

l-168
5. OPERATION

(d) PMC-RB4

%@A 1
%@O1
2 BINARY&
3 NO1
4 PMC-RB4 1
%1
%@l1
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1

10 REMARKS1
% 1
ae2-c 1
RO200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1
$1 '$'P~wER$$' 'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'J.
RO300.0 1
$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'1
PO008 OPEN-FRONT1
$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1
LO100 INITIALIZE1
$1 " 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'&
$1
$@3 1
RD RlOOl.03.
3R R120.3 1
9ND R1000.2 1
nlRTY2000.4 1
(*
Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters
1 Net comment
which are input with personal computer can be used.
R)
RD R1OO1.O1
9ND R1000.2 1
dRT Y23.4 1
(* SP l1 form feed position (in Ladder diagram)
RD R1O1.O 1
OR R123.4 1
AND R100.21
WRT Y200.41
% 1
%@a 1
AOO.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ
AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1
% 1
%@5 1
X000 1 0 1 IDlBC&
YO08 1 0 4 OD32Al
%1
%@E1

1-169
5. OPERATION

5.7.6 The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a
model

When using the step sequence method, mnemonic instructions cannot be coded.
The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes:

1) Programming by Mnemonic instructions


A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic instructions. It is impossible to
create a step sequence program with a text editor, or to read the program into FAPT LADDER
by means of mnemonic-to-source conversion.

2) Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source Conversions


If source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequence source program, only ladder
subprograms are converted to mnemonics, step sequence subprograms being ignored. If a
step sequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonic conversion, then to
mnemonic-to-source conversion, the original source program will not be replicated.

3) Source Program Conversion using Mnemonics


A program can be converted by using mnemonics, as shown below:

1
I PMC-RB3 , * PMCRC3

t
(STEP SEQ)

A program for the PMC-FIB4 (STEP SEC?) cannot be converted for use with the PMCRC4
(STEP SEC), because of the reason explained in Section 7.2. The program can be converted
if a ROM file is used, however. (For details of this conversion, see the description of the
decompiler.)

l-170
5. OPERATION

5.7.7 User batch file execution

The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution of FAPT LADDER.

A user’s own batch file generated by editing the contents of the FLMNE.BAT file with a standard
text editor can also be executed.

l Examole 1

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended and text editor VZ is activated. (In this case,
VZ must be defined in the environment variable PATH beforehand.)

[Operation ]
Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNEBAT as follows:

vz

Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears.

Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution).

The following message appears:

Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'.
Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Specify A (Add), and specify *.HEX as the parameter. VZ is activated and a list of files
with the extension .HEX is displayed.

To restart FAPT LADDER. terminate VZ.

IReturn to FAPT LADDER. Hit any key! I

Press any key. The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu screen.

l Example 2

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended. Then, the command processor


COMMAND.COM is activated and MS-DOS commands are enabled. Create FLMNE.BAT as
follows:

COMMAND I

1 - 171
II. APPLICATIONS
(NOTES ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PG’AT

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC

This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format between a P-G (including the
Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232 cable. The command for NEC PC9801 series PCs is
FLOAD98, and the command for IBM PC/ATs is FLOADAT.

Use this function to transfer the sequence program between the P-G and a personal computer if
(data exchange function) cannot be used with 3.5” floppy, for example, in a system with the P-G
provided with a 5” floppy disk drive or in a system with a personal computer not provided with a
3.5” floppy disk (1.2 Mbytes) drive.

1.1.1 Command input during startup

(1) Uploading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.

FLOAD98 - [name of file for storing uploaded data] - -u (for PC9801)

FLOADAT - [name of file for storing uploaded data] - -u (for IBM PC/AT)

When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving data already exists in the
current directory, the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N >

(2) Downloading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.

FLOAD98 - [name of file for storing downloaded data] - -d (for PC9801)

FLOADAT _ [name of file for storing downloaded data] _ -d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown above, the load commands have the following two parameters:
-u: Uploads data from the P-G to the PC.
-d: Downloads data from the PC to the P-G.

(Note) The above parameters can be specified with either lowercase or uppercase characters.

2-l
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1 .1.2 Communications settings

PC side
NEC PC9801 Series baud rate: 4800 or 9600
(MS-DOS SPEED command) character length: 7 bits
parity: even parity
stop bits: 2 bits
X parameter: none

IBM PC/AT Series MODE COMI: 4800,E,7,2


(PC DOS MODE command) MODE COMl: 9600,E,7,2 (for 9600 baud)

P-G side
IO NC,CNl,Fl ,F6
10 NC,CNl,Fl,F6,BRlO (for 9600 baud)

(Note 1) The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. However, note that when the PC
baud rate is set to 9600, the parameter BRlO must be added to the baud rate setting
for the P-G.
(Note 2) It is necessary to set these communications setting only for doing this operation. After
using this function, please restore the communications settings as the section 2.1
(Chapter 1).

The CN number is not fixed. For the P-G or P-G Mark II, the CN number can be any setting from
CNl to CN4. For the P-G Mate, the CN number can be any setting from CNl to CN3. However,
note that the CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IO command. Use the
cables specified in Appendix 1.

2-2
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Operation examde
During uploading

Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents

c PC > < PG > Turn on power.


< PG > Enter IO command settings. ; IONC,CNl ,Fl ,FG(,BRlO)
c PC > PC9801 Series: Enter SPEED command ; (See Section 2 of Communications
settings. i Settings)
IBM PC/AT Series: Enter MODE
command settings. i
< PG > Store transmission data in P-G memory. : Press the [F2] key to select menu item
i no.2.
< PC > Execute FLOAD98. Enters waiting state. i FLOAD98 FILE NAME -u
Execute FLOADAT. Enters waiting state. i FLOADAT FILENAME -u
i < PC > “LOADER START” is displayed.
< PG > Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu. i
c PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the
submenu.
3egins transmission. i c PG > “EXECUTING” is displayed.
Completes transmission.
e PG > Returns to the menu. i =zPC > “Operation Complete” is displayed.
( PC > The message “Operation Complete” is i “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.
displayed, followed by the prompt “HIT ;
ANY KEY”. Hit any key to end operation. i

During downloading

Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents

< PC > < PG > Turn on power.


< PG > Enter IO command settings. ; IO NC,CNl,(BRlO,)Fl,FG
< PC > Enter SPEED command settings. i (See Section 2 of Communications
i Settings)
< PG > Turn on [Fl] key. Select no.2 on the ! =zPG > “EXECUTING” is displayed.
menu. Enters waiting state.
< PC > Execute FLOAD98. ; FLOAD98 FILE NAME -d
Execute FLOADAT. ; FLOADAT FILENAME -d
Begins transmission. i <PC> “Output Start” is displayed.
Completes transmission.
<PG> Returns to the menu.
< PC > The message “Operation Complete” is : < PC > “Operation Complete” is displayed.
displayed, followed by the prompt “HIT i “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.
ANY KEY”. Hit any key to end operation. i

2-3
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PG’AT

1 .1.3 Protocol

Durinq uploadinq
When the FLOAD98 or FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side, a communications
request is issued for the P-G and reception begins. After all data has been received, DC 3 is
sent and transmission is completed.

0 DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmission request).


8 Data is received.
Q Completion code is received and reception is completed.
@ DC 3 code is sent.

Transmission and reception both use the l-byte machine-dependent BIOS call for input and
output.

Durina downloadinq
After the P-G issues a transmission request, the P-G enters the waiting state. FLOAD98 or
FLOADAT is activated in the PC, then transmission begins. After all data has been sent. DC 4
is sent and transmission is completed.

0 The P-G issues DC 1.


8 DC 2 code is sent to the P-G.
@ Data is sent.
@ DC 4 code is sent.

Transmission and reception both use the l-byte machine-dependent BIOS call for input and
output.

1.1.4 BUSY control

When the transmission speed is faster than reception processing, BUSY control is performed by
issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. In the PC9801 series, the X parameter in the DOS SPEED
command is set to off, which allows the application to provide support for BUSY control. In the
IBM PC/AT series, there is no X parameter, which effectively has the same result.

2-4
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.1.5 Data start and end codes

The system will automatically determine which of the following seven pairs of start and end codes
is used. When none of these codes are used, an error message is displayed and operation
terminates.

(Note) The end codes


shown here must appear at
the beginning of a line. In
other words, strictly speaking,
a data reception end code is
actually denoted by the
sequence CR + LF + an end
code. End codes (% etc.)
appearing within comments
are ignored.

1.1.6 Data conversion (return codes)

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, it is converted into two characters, the first of which is CR
(ODH) followed by LF (OAH).

(2) When a CR code (ODH) is received, it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) is received, CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended to it in that order.

1.1.7 Transmission and receive data

Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.

1 1

1 1
. . ..-Discarded Valid data I...

After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, DC 3 is sent for uploading or DC 4 is sent for
downloading, then the file is closed.

2-s
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1 .1.8 Error detection and messages

This software detects the following four types of errors.

(1) When there is an error in the command line


Error in the file name, -u. or -d.

Parameter Error
FLOAD98 FILENAME -u/-d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)

(2) When the specified file cannot be found


Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.

I~- ~~~
Cannot open output file I

(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received
Wrong data received

(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code,


Start Code error detected

or there is a definite oroblem with the end code

IEnd code error detected

This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPT LADDER format.
This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPT LADDER data.

Messaaes

When the file name specified as the file for receiving data already exists in the current directory,
the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N >

2-6
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.1.9 Error detection and handling

1. Incorrect entry found in the command line.

2. Specified file cannot be opened.

3. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.

The following causes can be considered for the above errors:

0 The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).


0 The start code has been omitted (%@‘, where l is A or 0 to 5. was omitted).
l Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.
l Garbage data exists between each unit of data.
l The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER format.

When any of the above errors is detected, the current operation is canceled.

During downloading, if an error is detected on the PC, the system will return to the DOS
screen. At the same time, a %, %@E or other end code is sent to the P-G to return it to the
menu screen.

4. Others

l When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted


(When the power to the PC or P-G is interrupted during operation, etc.)

When data transfer is interrupted during uploading, the system will enter a waiting state until
data transfer is restarted. (To interrupt the waiting state, press cCTRl_> + <C >).
When data transfer is interrupted during downloading, the data becomes corrupt and data
transfer must be started over from the beginning.

2-7
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT

1.2 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program

By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type sequence program to
another type of it.

1.2.1 Converting by system parameter editing

On the following PMC type, it is possible to edit the different PMC type data by changing system
parameter of the mnemonic data.
However, format of the system parameter, usable functional instructions and range of address are
different.

1~ CNC TYPE I PMC TYPE

FS16f 18-T/M PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RB!YRB6~RC/RC3/RC4

Power Mate-MODEL D PMC-PA1 /PA3

[Example: PMC-RB + PMC-RC3]


(1) Set the PMC type to PMC-RB and convert the original source program to mnemonic file.
(2) Change the system parameter of the mnemonic fife to PMCRC3 with a standard text editor.
(3) Set the PMC type to PMC-RC3 on FAPT LADDER system and convert the mnemonic
file(+(2)) to source program.

Original file (PMC-RB) Converted file (PMCRC3

%@A %@A
%@O %@O
2 ECD 2 BCD
Change
3 NO system parameter 3 NO
4 PMC-RB b 4 PMC-RC3
7 100 5 000000
9 YES 6 50
% 7 100
%@l %
01 ABC-KIKAI %@l
02 S-DRILL 01 ABC-KIKAI
02 S-DRILL

%
%@5 %
X000 1 0 1 ID16C $65
YO08 1 0 4 OD32A X000 1 0 1 IDl6C
% YO08 1 0 4 OD32A
%@E 8
%@E

2-8
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.2.2 Convert with signal address converter

CONVERTER
APPLICABLE PMCCNC TYPE REFERENCE MATERIALS
FILE NAME

FS()T CNV.SYM PMC-uM/M(MMC) -+ PMC-RAl iRA2IRA3IRB FANUC PMC


-
(FSO-T) /RB2’RB3’RB4’RB5’ PROGRAMMING MANUAL
RBG/RC/RC3/RC4
(LADDER LANGUAGE)
(FS16/18-T)
B-61 863E
FSOM CNV.SYM PMC-UM/M(MMC) + PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB
-
(FSO-M) /RB2/RB3!RB4/RB5/
RBG/RC/RCB/RC4
(FS16/18-M)

PM-C_CNV.SYM PMC-P + PAllPA


(Power Mate (Power Mate
-MODEL C) -MODEL D)

(Note) The converter file is stored in the directory APPENDIX of module floppy disk.

[Example: PMC-P + PMC-PA11

(1) Set PMC type to PMC-P, and convert the original source program to the mnemonic file. (+A.)
(2) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl. And input the source program name and select [END] at edit
mode without editing the ladder program.
(3) Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (+B.)
(4) Quit FAPT LADDER, and activate any standard text editor.
(Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.)
(5) Replace the symbol and comment data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the converter file
(PM-C.CNV). (+C.)
(6) Replace the ladder data of mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the ladder data of the original
mnemonic file (PMC-P). (+D.)
(7) Complete the text editor, and activate FAPT LADDER.
(8) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl, and convert the mnemonic file@) to source program.
(3) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment data.

2-9
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Convert file
PM-C - CNV.SYM

%@2
A. Original file 60004.3 G68.3
(PMC-P) 60005.0 695.0
%@A 60005.2 695.2
%@O 60005.3 G95.3
B. Converted file
1 2048 60005.6 G83.7
(PMC-PAl)
% G0006.2 675.2
be1 60006.4 674.4 %@A
B 60007.2 G68.2 %@O
b@2 G0007.5 684.5 2 BINARY
b 3 NO
b@3 4 PMC-PA1
?D X21.4 X1027.4 X23.4 %
iRT G121.4 X1027.5 X23.5 eel
tD.NOT X22.3 X1027.6 X23.6 %
fRT.NOT 6122.3 X1027.7 X23.7 se2
c b
:UB 1
IUB 2
I$- D. insertion ,- ae3
fRT 6121.4 b
!D.NOT X22.3 se4
rRT.NOT 6122.3 b
UB 1 se5
UB 2 b
b@E
@E

2-10
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.2.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program

Data (such as title, symbol & comment, ladder, message, and I/O module data) in a sequence
program can be used for another sequence program, by the following method.

The range of addresses used varies from one model to another. They may have to be modified.
Refer to the programming manual of the respective models.

[Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]

%@A %@A
%@O %@O
2 BCD 2 BCD
3 NO 3 NO
4 PMC-RB 4 PMC-RC3
7 100 5 000000
9 YES 6 50
% 7 100
eel 9 YES
%
%@l
%@2
x000.0 2PX.M -
x000.1 2PY.M
X000.0 ZPX.M
X000.1 ZPY.M

1.3 Standard Symbol Data

When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined, it is possible to use the
standard symbol name provided by FANUC.

CNC TYPE DATA FILE NAME

FS16/18-T F16&F18-T.SYM

FS16/18-M FlG&F18-M.SYM

Power Mate-MODEL D PM-D.SYM

Power Mate-MODEL H PM-H.SYM

(Note) The standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX.

2-11
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4 Changing Printer Output Format

Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially available text editor so
that the output format shown in each of the following frames can be changed.

-AMROFTRP. DAT -PR201-10 . INF -


1 Diagram output % PR201-15 . INF
1. Change the paper
selection name PR201-A4 . INF
2. Set the top margin PRlO-A . INF
3. Set the net interval PRlS-A . INF
4. Set the printer model and PRA4-A . INF
ESC-P-10 . INF
paw
L
ESC-P-15 . INF
ESCPl O-A. INF
ESCPl5-A. INF
-CROSSING. DAT
-FANUC-10. INF -
(Setting the cross-reference
list output format)
5. Set the line spacing
8. Set the output format 6. Set the left margin
guidance information 7. Set the title of printout
9. Set the output information
10. Specify the output format
11. Set the read/write coil
guidance information
12. Specify the linefeed
13. Specify the page break

For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here.

2-12
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

#PAPER=lO-G
: flO-A=lO-inch/ASCII
i LENGTHL=ll
i LENGTH=11
: WIDTHL=lO
: WIDTH=10
; PTCHL=lS/lZO
: LI
: z
- Print format :.......) .:

LEFTMGL=O
b-1 ‘i LEFTWG=O
lo-inch/ASCII ................................ ....: TOPMGL=O
*lo-inch/graphic TOPMG=O
15-inch/ASCII LCNTL=4
15-inch/graphic C_FI LE+-ij
A4 portrait/ASCII O_FILE;PRTDAT.DMP
A4 portrait/graphic #END,:'
#lQ'G=lO-inch/graphic
LENGTHL=ll
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=lO
WIDTH=10
- ,:gq: 5
. .. .:.:,‘~:.:,~~:-:
$ 6”:~:~7~8~,.‘g~~10
:; ‘,.y “F
.((.,.,
.,...,._._.
~j$.#).. PTCHL=lS/lZO
.,...
>‘:“:” ,. : :

,,.. :.’

I-

A. SETUP screen (diaqram output)


LEFTMGL=O
b-2’
LEFTWG=O
TOPMGL=O
TOPMG=O

:’
:
:’
:
:
:
:.
:’
:’
.*. B. AMROFTRP.DAT file
:
: /
:,:...:... :...,,.. . ::.,~,,,.,.... .,>,,:
.....,.,
...... .‘. ..:.. >:

C-l. l.lNF files selectable at #l O-A C-2. l.lNF files selectable at #10-G
jindicated aoainst a white backaround) lindicated aaainst a white backaround)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._......
(Example) If lo-inch/graphic is selected in A:
0 In 8, setting b-2 is valid.
@ In C-2, a setting of PR201-lO.INF isvalid. i
. . . . . . . ..“...........‘......................................................................

2-13
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.1 Changing the paper selection name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

9MROFTRP.DAT #l O-A = lo-inch!ASCII Arbitrary character string consisting of


#l O-G = 1O-inch!graphic up to 30 half-size (or 15 full-size)
#15-A = 15inch/ASCII characters
#15-G = 15-inch/graphic
#A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII
#A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic

(Note) #A4L-A = and #A4L-G = are unavailable in the IBM PC/AT system.

1.4.2 Setting the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

AMROFTRP.DAT TOPMGL = 0 Decimal number


TOPMG = 0
(for each form)

1.4.3 Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout can be
changed in the manner shown below.

NO0003
C
II II
YO.7 YO.0
00001 +00006 00001 l00006
NO0004
D
YO.0 YO.7 YO.1
l00006 00001
NO0005
YO.0 YO.1 YO.7 YO.2
E
.00006 00001 +00008
YO.0 YO.1 YO.7 YO.2
+00006 00001 +00008

When LCNTL = 4 When LCNTL = 5

2-14
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT

File edited Modifications Settings

AMROFTRP.DAT LCNTL = 4 Specify either 4 or 5


(Set for each sheet) I

1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change the printer model and print paper that are specified during paper selection.
PR201 is not usable in the IBM system.

Name of file Point of l.lNF that can be


Printer name Print paper type/print mode
to be edited change set

AMROFTRP. #l O-A PRlO_A .INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII


DAT : PR201_10 .INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCPlO_A.INF VP1000 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII
C;FILE = ESC_P_lO . INF VP1 000 1O-inch continuous form/graphic
FANUC_10. INF FANUC printer 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII

#10-G PRlO_A .INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII


. PR201_10 .INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCPlO_A. INF VP1 000 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII
C.-FILE = ESC P lO.INF VP1000 1O-inch continuous form/graphic
FAN%zlO. INF FANUC printer lo-inch continuous form/ASCII

#15-A PR 15-A .INF PR201 15inch continuous form/ASCII


PR201_15 .INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCP15 A. INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII
C-FILE = ESC_P_i5. INF VP1 000 15-inch continuous form/graphic

#15-G PRlS_A .INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/ASCII


PR201_15 .INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic
ESCPIS A.INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII
C;FILE = ESC _ P1 15.INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/graphic

#A4L-A PRA4_A .INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII


: (Note) PR201_A4 .INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

C;FILE =

#A4L-G PRA4_A .INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII


: (Note) PR201_A4 .lNF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

C;FILE =

(Note) This item is not supported in the IBM system.

2-15
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.5 Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the
one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

l.INF LPI (H) (1 B) (C) (120) ; (H) (1 B) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ;
LDRLPI (H) (1 B) (C) (T15) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Tedecimal number >) ;

1.4.6 Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the
one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

IName of file to be
edited
Point of change

1LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOOO);


Settings

I(H) (1B) (C) (LKdecimal number>) ;

2-16
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC,‘AT

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 1 (settings in file AMROFTRP.DAT)

Changing the types of


#PAPER = 10-G
printout paper #PAPER = I O-G
L #10-A= 10 inch/ASCII * #lo-A=NEC 10
The name is changed from LENGTHL = 11
LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11 1:lO inch’ to ‘l:NEC 10’. LENGTH = 11
WIOTHL = 10 WIDTHL = 10
see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.) WIDTH- 10.
WIDTH = 10
PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83 uw:L ;E”
When ‘1’ is LINES = 55
RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO; = 2/3
selected as RATIO = 2/3 RATIO = 213
GRAMODL = 14 GRAMODL = 14
the printout GRAMOD = 16
GRAMOD = 16
paper ANKMODL = 0 ANKMODL = 0
ANKMOD = 1 ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0
Changing the upper margin LEFTWG = 0
l TOPMGL =0 ;c$w’-=,5
* TOPMG = 0
(The upper margin is set to )
* LCNTL = 4 5 characters.) LCNTL = 4
L C FILE = PRlO AJNF C-FILE = PRlO_A.INF
O-FILE = PRTtiAT.DMP
Changing the types of 2EFlkE * PRTDAT.DMP
&ND printout paper *
L #10-G = 10 inch/graphic #l O-G = EPSON 10
LENGTHL = 11
(The name is changed from LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11 ‘2:15 inch’ to ‘2:EPSON 10’. LENGTH = 11
;/w&i’ ; A0 WIDTHL = 10
See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.) WIDTH = 10
PITCHL: 15/l 20 PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83 LINESL = 83
LINES = 55 LINES = 55
RATIOL = 2/3 RATIOL = 2/3
When ‘2’ is RATIO - 2M
RATIO = 213
selected as GRAMODL = 14 GRAMODL = 14
GRAMOD = 16 GRAMOD = 16
the printout ANKMODL = 0
ANKMODL = 0
paper ANKMOD = 1 ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0 LEFTWG = 0
l TOPMGL = 0
TOPMGL = 0
. TOPMG = 0 ym& ‘;40
+ LCNTL = 4
Changing the type of printer
* C-FILE = PR20l_lO.INF C-FILE :ESCPlO A.INF
(The printer is changed to ) fEF&E = PRTDAf.DMP
OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP
EPSON VP1000 and the paper
+ #I 5-A = 15 inch/ASCII 115-A = 15 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL = 11
is changed to IO-inch forms.) LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11 LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = 15 WIDTHL = 15
WIDTH = 15 WIDTH = 15
PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83 #L ;k
LINES = 55
When ‘3’ is RATIOL = 213 RATIO; = 2/3
RATIO = 213 RATIO = 2M
selected as GRAMODL = 16
GRAMODL = 16
the printout GRAMOD = 16 GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 1 ;;EIg;L 71
paper ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTMGLZ 0
LEFTWG = 0 LEFTWG = 0
+ TOPMGL = 0
Changing the spacing between TOPMGL = 0
+ TOPMG = 0 :he LADDER nets TbPMb = 0
+ LCNTL = 4
* LCNTL = 5
. C-FILE = PRl S_A.INF :The net spacing for the C FILE = PR15 A.INF
OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP -ADDER diagram is widened.) O-FILE = PRT@AT.DMP
#END
*#15-G-15 inch *#15-G--15 inch

(Note) An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.

2-17
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 2 (settings in fife PR201_1O.INF)

.. ..
.. ..
.. ..

PRZOlH3 CNTINF {
CRLF
FORMF
CPI
CANCEL
LDRCP I
* LPI (H) W)(C) (T2D);
* LDRLP I (H) w (C) (Tl5) ;
* LMARGIN (H)WW)(LDDD);
RMARGIN (H) W (C) t/D781 ;
LDRCHAR (H) (18) (C) (50014);
JPNSET (HwB)ww;
JPNRESET (H) W W (H) ;
1
.. ..
.. ..
.. ..

Setting the spacing Setting the left margin


between lines (Left margin is set to 5
(Line spacing is set to 25.) characters.)
I I

PRZOlH3 CNTINF (
CRLF W)(OD,OA);
FORMF yw{:
CANCEL
CPI OWhH);
LDRCP I (H) (1B) (C) (Q) ;
LPI (H)W)WT25);
LORLP I (HWWC)(Tl5);
LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOD5) ;
RMARGIN (H) (18) (C)(/078);
LORCHAR (H) (16) (C) (50014);
JPNSET (H) W) w (K);
JPNRESET (H) W (C)(H);

(Note) An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.

2-18
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.7 Setting the title of printout

This item can change the title of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the one
specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Vame of file to be

:INF
edited

SYS-TITLE
Point of change
~~ -T
(C) (<any
Settings

character string consisting


(C) (” System parameter “) ; of up to 60 half-size (or 30 full-size)
characters > ) ;
CMT-TITLE
(C) (” Symbol & comment ““‘) ;

LAD-TITLE
(C) (* Ladder diagram “) ;

IO-TITLE
(C) (* I!0 module data “) ;

MSG-TITLE
(C) (” Message data 7 ;

TIT-TITLE
(C) (” Title data 7 ;

CRS-TITLE
(C) (” Cross-reference “) ;

BIT-TITLE
(C) (” Bit address map T ;

LS-TITLE
(C) (- List file 7 :

(Note) Half-size katakana characters cannot be used.

1.4.8 Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information

This item can specify characters to be output as guidance information to be output during cross-
reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as
guidance information.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE = Any character string consisting of up


to 19 bytes

2-19
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.9 Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as cross-reference information. If both
step and net numbers are specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In the
CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as cross-reference
information.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT NET-INF = When only the net number is output:


STEP-INF = NET-INT = 1
STEP-INF = 0
When only the step number is output:
NET-INT = 0
STEP-INF = 1
When the net and step numbers are
output in the stated sequence:
NET-INT = 1
STEP-INF = 2
When the step and net numbers are
output in the stated sequence:
NET-INT = 2
STEP-INF = 1

1.4.10 Specifying the cross-reference list output format

This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of the step and net numbers. In
the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

CROSSINF.DAT 1 FORM = I Character string + ‘%s’

(Note) Only letters in lowercase are valid as ‘%s’.

Z-20
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.11 Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

This item can set a comment about coil attributes. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no
semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Vame of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited

XOSSINF.DAT READ = Character string consisting of up to


WRITE = 13 bytes.
When coils are indicated using
graphic symbols, specify as shown
below, and select “graphic” as the
diagram output format.
READ = -I I- -l/l- :
READ = -I I- -l/l- :
READ = -I I- :
READ = -I I- :
WRITE = -()- -(/)- :
WRITE = -()- :

1.4.12 Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no
semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be
Point of change
edited

CROSSINF.DAT 1NL = IDecimal number

(Note) In this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus 1 are inserted between
addresses. (If 0 is specified as the linefeed count, no space line is inserted between
addresses.)

1.4.13 Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with
no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

IName of file to be
edited

:ROSSINF.DAT FF =
Point of change Settings

‘0’ = the page is not advanced


‘1’ = the page is advanced

2-21
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.14 Setting the output format guidance

A desired character string can be output as guidance when the cross reference list is printed. In
the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is
valid.

File edited Modifications Settings


I I

CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE = Desired character string of up to 19


bvtes

1.4.15 Setting the output information

As the cross reference output information, step numbers, net numbers, or both can be output.
When both step and net numbers are output, the order in which they are printed can be specified.
In the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is
valid.

File edited Modifications Settings

CROSSINF.DAT NET-INF = Only net numbers are output.


STEP-INF = NET-INF = 1
STEP-INF = 0
Only step numbers are output.
NET-INF = 0
STEP-INF = 1
Net numbers and step numbers are
output in that order.
NET-INF = 1
STEP-INF = 2
Step numbers and net numbers are
output in that order.
NET-INF = 2
STEP-INF = 1

1.4.16 Setting the output format

A character string can be printed in front of each step or net number. In the CROSSINF.DAT file,
data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

File edited Modifications Settings


1 I

CROSSINF.DAT I FORM = I Character string + ‘%s’

(Note) With ‘%s,” only the lowercase letter s is valid.

2-22
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.17 Setting the read/write coil guidance

A comment about each coil attribute can be specified. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line
beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

File edited Modifications Settings

CROSSINF.DAT READ = Character string of up to 13 bytes.


WRITE = To print a coil with graphic
characters, specify as follows and
select graphic diagram output.

READ=- 1 I- -I/j-:
READ=-II- -I/I-:
READ= -1 I- :
READ= -I I- :
WRITE = -()- -(I)- :
WRITE = -()- :

(Note) With ‘%s,’ only the lowercase letter s is valid.

1.4.18 Setting line feed

Blank lines can be inserted between the data of different addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file,
data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

-1

File edited Modifications Settings

CROSSINF.DAT NL = Decimal value

(Note) Blank lines of the specified number plus one are inserted between the data of different
address types. (If zero is specified as the line feed value, no blank lines are inserted.)

1.4.19 Setting form feed

The printing of the data of each address type can be started on a new page. In the
CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

File edited Modifications Settings

CROSSINF.DAT FF = ‘0’ = Form feed is executed.


‘1’ = Form feed is not executed.

2-23
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Environment settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
l Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file
:
GUIDEsSTEP No./NET No.
NET-INF=2
STEP-INF-1
FROM=S%s/N%s
READ--I I- -I/I- :
WRITE=-()- -(/)- :
NL=l
FF=O
;

0 Sample cross reference output


6
1 [A:YFLADDER4(SAMPLE]
*** Cross reference *** PAGE 1
STEP NO./NET No.
Address Symbol Comment
x0.0
-II-Yl+ : S00045/N00009 SOOO49/NOOO12 S00053/N00013 S00082/N00017
SOOO88/NOOO20 SOOO94/NOOO2
x0.1
-It-+ : s00050/N00010 SOOO54/NOOOl2 SO0059/N00015 S00065/N00017
S00077/N00029

YO.0 Double writing


U-Q-: S00045/N00009 SOO128/NOOO62 S00256/N00098

RO.0
-Ii-++ : S00009/N00003 SOOOl2/NOOOO8 S00014/N00009 SOOOl5/NOOOlO
S00022/N00010 S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017
S00047/N00019 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035
SOOOO2/N00001

2-24
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Environment settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
l Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

GUIDE-Step number
NET-INF=O
STEP-INF=l
FROM=S$s
READ=read
WRITE=Write
NL-0
FF=O
:

0 Sample cross reference output

[A:YFLADDERYSAMPLE]
l ** Cross reference l ** PAGE 1
Step number
Address Symbol Comment
x0.0
Read : SO0045 SO0049 SO0053 SO0082 SO0088 SO0094
x0.1
Read : SO0050 SO0054 SO0059 SO0065 SO0077
YO.0 Double writing
Write : SO0045 SO0128 SO0256
RO.0
Read : SO0009 SO0012 SO0014 SO0015 SO0022 SO0024 SO0033 SO0045
so0047 so0074 so0079
Write : soooo2

2-25
III. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

1. OVERVIEW

1.1 What is a Step Sequence ?

The step sequence is one method for programming the sequence control governed by a
programmable controller. This method features the direct representation of the control flow on a
flow chart. Each block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the ladder method.
Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the processes and is well-suited to
the control of entire processes.

For details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.

” FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1 /PA3/RAl /FWWtA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4~NB/NB2


PROGRAMMING MANUAL(LADDER LANGUAGE) B-61863/06”

1.2 Programming with the Step Sequence Method

The programming with step sequence method is supported by Fapt ladder, not but by the built-in
editing function on FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4!RB6/RC4/NB2.
Setting a model in Fapt ladder decides which method, step sequence or ladder, is used.

1.3 A Program Configuration Screen

If a model that supports the step sequence function is selected, a program can be edited in units of
subprograms. To enable this, a subprogram configuration screen has been added.
This screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editing of a target subprogram.

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RCa(STEP SEQ) [A:yFLYDATAYSFCOl]


PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2 0 LEVEL3


i0"'tiUOO1.'
0 PO002 0 PO004 0 PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007
0 PO008 0 PO009 0 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017
0 PO021 0 PO022 0 PO024 0 PO025 0 PO026 q]POO27
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
0 PO101 0 PO202 0 JPO304 q]PO405 0]PO406 qJPO407
Sub-program : PO001

I DELETE
I
NEW ZOOM

3-l
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

1.4 The Configration of a Sequence Program

A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit;

- The 1st level of ladder


- The 2nd level of ladder
- The 3rd level of ladder
- Subprograms of ladder sequence
- Subprograms of step sequence

LEVEL 1 (LADDER) I

LEVEL 2 (LADDER)

LEVEL 3 (LADDER)

Sub Program Pl (Step Sequence)


I

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)


1

ISub Program P3 (LADDER) I

Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

3-2
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

1.5 Data Flow

-PC9801*IBWPC/AT

Source program
Mnemonic program
Ladder 1st level Mnemonic
conversion A mnemonic program without
Ladder 2nd level - step sequence
Ladder 3rd level -

Subprogram Pl 7

Subprogram P2

Compilation/Decompilation

Object code

I
L
ROM format program I

t '71
Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output

Transfer data Floppy cassette Memory card


4 4 4
- RS232C - Handy File. - Memory card
- FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER

-CNC I
v + v
1) [PMCI 1) [PMCI 1) IPMCI
2) II/O1 2) I I/O1 2) II/O1
3)[HOST] 3)[FDCAS] 33) [MCARD]
(Boot process also can
read the memory card)
The operation of soft key when input/output

3-3
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

2. SETTING A MODEL

2.1 Operation

(1) Starting FAPT LADDER


At the MS-DOS prompt, key in FLADDER.

(2) Displaying the initial screen


Once the system edition, copyright. and other information have been displayed, press any key.

FAPT LADDER

AOEB-92014502#EN

Ver 08.0 1994.07.22

Copyright (C) 1991 FANUC LTD

END ? (Y:END, 0THER:RESUME MENU)

(3) Displaying the main menu


When the menu screen is displayed as shown below, press the < F7 > (SETUP) key.

MAIN MENU [A:YFLYDATAYSFCY 1

Fl KEY : EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT
F3 KEY : COMPILE
F4 KEY : DISCOMPILE
F5 KEY : LINK
F6 KEY : I/D
F7 KEY : SETUP
FE KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT
F9 KEY : UTILITY
FlO KEY : END

EDIT COMPIL DISCPL I/D SETUP UTILTY END

3-4
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(4) Setting the PMC model


To use the step sequence function, select PMC-XXX(STEP SEQ or PMC-RB6 or PMC-NB2)
(model which supports the step sequence function) from the listed models.

SETUP RCQ(STEP SEQ)

PMC-RAl
PMC-RA2
.
.
PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)
.
.
* PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ)
.
.

Select by cursor and hit [Enter] key.

COPY END
I I

3-5
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

3. EDITING

This section describes how to create a step sequence program.

3.1 Basic Operation

(1) Displaying the main menu


Press the < Fl > (EDIT) key.

MAIN MENU [A:YFLYDATAYSFC% 1

Fl KEY : EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT
F3 KEY : COMPILE
F4 KEY : DISCOMPILE
F5 KEY : LINK
F6 KEY : I/O
F7 KEY : SETUP
F8 KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT
F9 KEY : UTILITY
FlO KEY : END

EDIT COMPIL DISCPL I/O SETUP UTILTY END

(2) Selecting the program to be edited


Enter the name of the source program to be edited.

SELECT SOURCE PROGRAM Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC% 1

SOURCE PROGRAM NAME : TEST

EXEC END
I

Press the c Fl > key. The screen changes, depending on the program to be entered.

1) If a new program name is specified:


The model setting screen is displayed. Re-confirm the selected model.
Then, the edit menu is displayed.
2) If the specified name is that of a program created for a model which differs from the
selected model:
The selected model is automatically changed according to the specified program. Then,
the edit menu is displayed.
3) If the specified name is that of a program created for the selected model:
The edit menu is displayed.

3-6
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

To return to the main menu, press the < FlO> or < ESC> key. As the program name, enter
up to eight alphanumeric characters, without an extension.

(3) Displaying the editing menu


Press the < F2 > (LADDER/STEP SEQUNCE) key.

EDIT RCI(STEP SEQ) [A: YFL~DATAYsFcY 1

Fl KEY : TITLE
F2 KEY : LADDER / STEP SEQUENCE
F3 KEY : SYMBOL h COMMNET
F4 KEY : MESSAGE
F5 KEY : I/O MODULE
F6 KEY : SYSTEM PARAMETER
FlO KEY : END

1 TITLE ILADSFC ISYMBOL IMESSAG IMODULEISYSPRM 1


I I I I I
I
I
I
I
I ENDI
I I

(4) Subprogram configuration screen


The subprogram configuration screen is displayed as shown below:

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:YFLyDATAYSFCOl]


PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

..0
. LEVEL1
........... . 0 LEVEL2 0 LEVEL3
‘m;i’J)@ti$., 0 PO002 0 PO004 0 PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007
0 PO008 0 PO009 0 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017
0 PO021 0 PO022 0 PO024 0 PO025 0 PO026 qJPOO27
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
0 PO101 0 PO202 q]PO304 q ]PO405 q]PO406 q]PO407
Sub-program : PO001

I I I I DELETE
I
NEW ZOOM

3-7
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Note 1) The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.


Note 2) If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain depth, and if the
subprogram configuration screen is displayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key,
the editing of the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed is suspended.
Such subprograms are marked with A].

(5) Step sequence diagram


Position the cursor to a program marked with 01, then press the [ZOOM] or <RET> key.
The step sequence editing screen is displayed as shown below:

DIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~]


.... .,:,:
,..:.)))):. PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
(..>:‘t’:i
J@J$,

7 s3 cl Sll 0 s13 q s21 cl s31

4 (Note 1)
Note 1) The current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated.
The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screen
and 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor is positioned to
any element on the screen.

3-8
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

3.2 Creating a Step Sequence

3.2.1 Creating a subprogram of the step sequence

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RCI(STEP SEQ) [A:~FL~DATAfSFCOl]


PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2 0 LEVEL3


;/$;;-'i:&jflQ~!n
.: i,,.
,..
....
...i........ ]POOO2 0 PO004 0 PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007
0 PO008 0 PO009 0 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017
0 ]POO21 0 PO022 0 PO024 0 PO025 0 PO026 q]POO27
. . . . .
. . . . . .

I DELETE NEW ZOOM

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key Other keys


[ DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram [ROLL UP] : Displaying previous screen
[NEW ] : Creating a new subprogram [ROLL DOWN] : Displaying next screen
[ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram

Meaning of display

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:%FLYDATAYSFCOl]

Edit : FAPT LADDER editing screen


(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) : The list screen of subprogram
PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) : Setting a model
[A: Y FL.. : Current directory

I PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

PROGRAM : Remarks which is one of the title data

aLEVEL q LEVEL2 OLEVEL3


I
LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder
LEVEL2 : The 2nd level of ladder
LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder
(In case of PMC-RC4 the 3rd ladder level can be omitted, in case of PMCRB4
the 3rd ladder level does not exist.)

0 PO001 q]POOO2 0 PO004 0 PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007

Cl -: a subprogram of the ladder


01 : a subprogram of the step sequence

3-9
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(1) Creating a new subprogram


- Press the [NEW] key.

New program name ? m

- Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, for example).

- Press the [F2 ] key.

(2) Modifying a subprogram


- Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for example), then press the
[ZOOM] or <RET> key. Alternatively, position the cursor to P200 then press the
[ZOOM] or <RET > key.

- If a subprogram number marked with A ] (P21, for example) is selected, the following
message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.


Continue to select it 7 (Yes/No) [Yl 1

To continue the editing session using the results obtained from suspended previous editing
session, press the < RET > key. To cancel the results of the previous editing session and edit
the subprogram from its original state, enter < N >.

3.2.2 Creating a step sequence program

The basics and configuration of the step sequence are described in the following document:
“FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4/RC4 Supplementary Description of Programming (Ladder Language)
B-61 863EI05-3”

On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed, depending on the position of the
cursor.

When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu is displayed.

I ...I I
I
+- La
‘:ti;:ili;;$;$
cl] s2 0 s20 cl s30

cl 101 01 I -+ JHP FUNC CHK ZOOM

3-10
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

1 0 I: Step subprogram [ tLBL ] : Label for jump


1 UJI 1: Initial step subprogram I A- I: The end of block step
[ 01 I: Block step subprogram ( FUNC ] : Various functions
1 I I : Line for link [ CHK ] : Grammatical checking
[ +JMP ] : Jump to label ( ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is displayed.

FUNC CHK ZOOM

[ t I: Transition
I l- I : Divergence of selective sequence
[ l== 1: Divergence of simultaneous sequence
I I I: Line for link
I t- I : Convergence of selective sequence
[t== 1: Convergence of simultaneous sequence
[ I :
[ FUNC ] : Various functions
[ CHK ] : Grammatical checking
[ ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

(1) Entering a step


Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [Cl] key.
Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.

Pressing the [n] key causes a step to be created, as shown below.


A free step number is automatically assigned.

iii;‘iij,t~.:.:.~.:.Y::“:
~~~
.;:.S $5
::::!,:i-i_._:~:”
..,.:.._

STEP :......Sl
ACTION :?
l-1

I - JMP +LBL -L FUNC CHK ZOOM

The specified subprogram number (PlO in this example) is displayed below Sl.

3-11
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

STEP : 81
ACTION : PlO
l-l

To change the step number, press the <RET> key to position the character cursor ” .?’ on
STEP and use the [BS] key to change the number.

.:$:f:B~~:.:~
~~~~:
T;f;y .. ..... :.:.::.:
,,i;;,;i;y:::::::::
:>:..
,...,.:.:::::::::
)::::::, ::::“::...:.:.:.:.:.~..~:
.: .). :.:.:, :.:.: :.’

STEP : Slg
ACTION : PlO
l-l

(2) Entering a transition


Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [ + ] key.
Enter a subprogram number

Press the [ + ] key.

ACTION : ‘.:$
l-2

FUNC CHR ZOOM

Enter a subprogram number.

o)i ,:ilFI:t:~:~::s:‘~~~~~~
.\: .. :..:‘::p::; ;I:,. ,.:
.),.

3 :.:~~~~~
:
.::.::. ....::
j::+ ::~.~:~,~.~::~~~:~,:::~.:,~,.~:i.~
.‘::.‘; :........, ..:.:“::>,. .>
,:, ... ... ;,.;..
:
+ : ...i.;:; 1:::....::.:.I,., :..

ACTION : $100
l-2

3-12
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(3) Divergence of selective sequence


Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 --_I key.

FUNC CHR ZOOM

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 -_I key.

I I

(4) Convergence of selective sequence


Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ f -] key.

ACTION : PlO&
2-4

1 +. I+_Il=zl 1 It-_lt__l FUNC CHK ZOOM

3-13
- -
-x -
u
g z
u
- -
u
-z
Y
z
-
-
II

-
II
II II
c t
- -
i j_
- -
-
- -
II II
II II
+ -_,
- -
I I
+ +
- -
+ t
- -
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Specifying a label for jump destination


Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [- LBL] key.
Then, enter a label name.

Press the [+ LBL] key.

LABEL : Ll@;
l-l

I + JMP +LBL 1 FUNC CHR ZOOM

Enter a label name.

STEP : Sl
ACTION : PlO
l-l

3-15
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(8) Specifying a label jump


Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [+ JMP] key.
Then, enter a label name.

Press the [+ JMP) key.

A...
LEBEL : $$
2-3

I + JMP + LBL FUNC CHK 200?4

Enter a label name.

+- L10
101 s1

f-r
I
PlOO PlOO
I::,::'
:.i,jjj.~:~:i'i.li~:~;i:
:;.;
._
.,;::;.
';
y<.:.y
, q ]s 2 ;I:;:-"'
:i'i.:.:?.i':...
&A:itxiO
.,.I.:::::i.:
...... .y,:,,;
,:>,
:::......
‘.:.:...:.:.:;.:.:.:.:.:.:
:~~:~.~:~::..‘.::‘:::::~::::~:~:~:::::
PlOO
t

LEBEL : Llfi:
2-3

3-16
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(9) Deleting an element


Position the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the [DEL] key.

Select the element by the <DEL> key and press the <return> key
I
In the example shown above, two figures (elements) of a selective branch and transition are
selected. Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse
video. To position the cursor displayed in reverse video, press the [DEL] key. To restore the
state shown above, press the (ESC] key.

If the [RETURN] key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective branch is deleted and
the following screen is displayed:

3-17
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

To specify another figure, press the [DEL] key again.

I
I01 Sl

..I

:::..

.k
... ,..,.......
:
.
.
.. .. ..

... ‘:~l;;;i;~g~.
.:..
>:..A .,

Inserting an element
Position the cursor to the desired insertion position, then press the [INS] key. To create an
mpty row, press the [INS] key.
o create an empty column, press the [SHIFT] and [INS] keys.

STEP : S2
ACTION : p 2 0 0 @$
l-3

3-18
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Press the (INS] key.

l-3

Press the [SHIFT] and [INS] key.

IO1 Sl

c Pl

Cl Sll cl s21
I I
STEP : S2
ACTION : PlO2
l-3

3-19
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(11) Search

q;;..“;.
,, ======i = ....::::. ...:j:::ji(ij:j.
..;:.I‘I:;:‘:‘: :.:.::: jj ::..:.
1

g$j::$i:.;.‘:“‘l:li:
I-J SlO Cl s20
;;.
(, .,...,::,,... _..t
: .. $5:": t
.~,
...
z:.
:)>>::..,:
.:
....
:>:
::.::.:
".."."..."~>;.>
.:.,.::.:.>
.?....
,.i..
,.,...
..........

Pl Pll P21

cl SlO Cl s20
T2 I I

If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, a pop-up menu is displayed as
shown below:

Fl Search
F2 Copy
F3 Move
F4 Main
FS List

cl Sll cl s21
Y3 I I

Press the [Fl] (Search) key. A pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

t
Pl

Fl Step
F2 Action
F3 Label
F4 symbol
F5 Position
F6 Top
F7 Bottom

3-20
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Then, press the (Fl] (Step) key. Another pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

Enter the step number to be searched for (S20, for example), then press the < RET > key.
The system starts searching through the part subsequent to the cursor.

Copying or moving an element


Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

Pl
t

3-21
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

When the [F8) (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is displayed as shown below:

Fl Search
F2 Copy
F3 Move
F4 mAin
FS List

Press the [F2) (Copy) key. The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.

ACTION :
Specify Start position l-2

Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example shown below), then
press the < RET > key. The system prompts the operator to enter the end point.

It
Pl
,.::
.gi.lj?“$;;;y;: :,:.: .>.::.::::::
,(,..:*:...
;;::,&T ,.:.:
,.,.: ,.
:: ‘:: :::::.::::::
1
... ...... .._

q]S2 :..:....:.:.:..q:‘-:
./\....:.::::
....,.,.,.,..
: IJ s20
::::.y::::
::,:;.
:: :.,::.:,,.
‘.‘. ,.:.
:::.;
.j,.
:.;.
.,,..,.‘.‘.,i
:::::.::::::.;::.:.+:

Pl Pll P21
i + +

I
ACTION :
Specify End position 2-3

3-22
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below), then
press the < RET > key. The system prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

:z’:’ J::”
;;; ~~~
:~~~~~~:~~~~
qlS2 I:::iliii:ll:i:li#i:~,::,:~:~:~:~~:
:::‘.zy ::.. j..:.:...:
.....:>:...:.:i\:.:
.:j;j;y .:i.~.I_:~~I:I:I:i.i:~~~~~~~~~:~~:~:,,~,~~
.....\.
...\\
.:....... ._.. ,.,
‘,,., ,,,,,.,,, :i,i:I:I:I:I’I:i:I’I:I:i::I:i6:i:
. ,. ;:~~:~,~:~:~:~:~:~:~::::::.,.~~.~::i:~.~r~:~~:::~~:..~,
::;:;:y:;:~:..:::::::::.:.:.:..:.:
:::.:;;::
::~~~~~::5::iili:~Bi:~:~~:::::~: .........:.:._.,.
........“‘.y,,: :.:.::;:::::::
:...::::z::i
‘,:,
p1 .;C.“
,,,.
<,,,::I:~;~~ws :,;:;i:@!:qgg
~~;~~~:;:,‘::.;..:,,
.,.,.,...
:.:.:..,:.:.:.:.:.
;:
..:,,
L.............
I:::.::‘: q.:.:
:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:i(.:.,.;....
.
:::;:y:i:::;
.....:..: :.:.::::::::::::::::::::::::........
,:::.
,.,.,.(
,.l,L..i_
‘:,:::,:::::::z:i::
i
:.:.....
c + ..,‘,‘,):‘,:
‘::.“:f+;~::‘:.:.:.::::::.:.:::.:.:.:
..:..
....:,. ::,:,...:
.,.y::
i:,.,
ACTION :
ISpecify End position 3-4

Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3 in the example shown below),
then press the < RET > key. The specified part is copied.

t Pl

ACTION : PlOO

When a part is copied,


- The S address is not copied. Assign a free number.
- The P address is copied. If required, change the address.

3-23
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(13) Returning from the ZOOM destination to the program configuration screen (MAIN).
To return to the program configuration screen, displayed when editing was started, follow the
procedure below. The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram,
from which the [ZOOM] key was pressed, is suspended.
The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file.

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

_....\\..
$1::”::;;g:: ........................
“.’
$Q;”
_, ,.,.,.
.‘.Yy.*
:.‘:;:::y:y:;:~::
.. ,.,_

$.:‘rii:” 0
1 SlO Cl s20
~~~~ tpll i

P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

F3 Move
F4 mAin
F5 List

rfter pressing the (F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~)


PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3


$@,iip;&#$ 0 ~0002 0 PO004 0 pooo5 0 poooe 0 p(JoO7
q ~0008 0 PO009 0 PO014 0 PO015 q PO016 0 PO017
A]~0021 0 PO022 0 PO024 0 PO025 0 PO026 q lPOO27
. . . . . .
. . . .
0 ~0101 b ~0202 q JPO304 0JPO405 c]]PO406 &PO407

3-24
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

If the subprogram whose previous editing session was suspended (marked with A]) is
selected again for editing, the following message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.


Continue to select it ? (Yes/No 1 [Yl

To continue the previous editing session, press the [RET] key.


Otherwise, enter N. (The result of the previous editing session is cancelled.)

(14)LIST
The list of subprograms referenced by the stepsequence subprogram that is currently being
edited is displayed.

Press the (F8] (FUNC) key.

i_i:.::~~.::;:.;
:.:::::.:::::ii:‘:I:‘i8iiiiiiii 7====j =
:~~~~~~~ Cl SlO cl s20
....... ‘.‘.:‘::.‘.‘.::.:.;.:
.I’.‘..
.I ........:.:,:.:::.:::.::::::~:;::~::,:
... .......‘+
.. t
:::,t .::~i;::‘i:::i::i::_:~::.~

Pl Pll P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

Pl
t
=II=I=t=III

Fl Search
F2 Copy
F3 Move
F4 mAin
F5 List

I I

After pressing the [F4] (LIST) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~]


PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
OJP200

0 PO008 0 PO009 0 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017


0 PO021 0 PO022 0 PO024 q PO025 0 PO026 q ]POO27

I MAIN CHANGE ZOOM

3-25
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key Other keys


[ MAIN ] :Displaying the subprogram [ROLL UP] : Displaying previous screen
configuration screen [ROLL DOWN] : Displaying next screen
[ CHANGE ] :Creating a new subprogram
[ ZOOM ] :Modifying a subprogram

Screen display

q ]P200
I I

The subprogram which is being edited is displayed. If the [ZOOM] key is pressed to nest the
program to a certain depth, the subprogram numbers are arranged from the left in the order in
which they are nested. The subprogram for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed first is
displayed at the left end.

( 0 PO008 0 PO009 [I3 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 q PO017

Subprograms referenced by the subprogram that is currently being edited are listed with the
following mark: :
cl : Ladder subprogram
cl] : Step sequence subprogram

(15)Checking the syntax


Press the [CHK] key.

Pl
t
gqc. :.::.:::,:::I:.‘:,:,::::....:.
.;:.(.‘:.:.:.:.~:.~::::::::::,

j:,..., :.:7 ./. I


;-,~:il~:~:~~
0
;,.,; ::~...,.,.: s1 0 0 s20
:,t-ll~~ t

Pll P21

3-26
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

If the step sequence is satisfactory, the following message is displayed:

$."f:" ... ....................

~~~~~~~~ I
.;.“..::..:.::;: .: ... . ... . .....

.....
.:.:.::

: : : >: : ..................
..?..): ..: ..:.:.:::: ..

0 slo

.:.::.:..:. .. .: “:.:‘:‘:j::::::::
:>::z: .::i;i::,i:i::llii;ili:iliiilcy;
2;:s:: ............
...
......> ....................

. :.:. ...................

Pl Pll Check completed


I

t t

If the step sequence is invalid, the following message is displayed:

+ Pl + ~11 [Chart Sequence error 1


I I

I I
(16)Modifying a subprogram (ZOOM)
Press the [ZOOM] key.

~~~~~~~l,;~~.~
:::::::: i ====7 =
:;:;:::::::;
;:::
:.:,:g:>::;:;:i:
“~~:~~~~di 0 SlO cl s20
. ::.:i”.:.:.:::::+
:..2;. t
::;:;$,.,,,,,;,:.,
:....::,:::.::.::
.jjj,::jjj:,:~~g::j:~:: t

Pl Pll P21

cl SlO Cl s20
Y2 I I

3 - 27
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

When the [ZOOM] key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides the type of subprogram
which is to be edited.

Figure Meaning of the figure Subprogram to be edited

0 Step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

101 Initial step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

01 block step sequence subprogram Step S8qU8nC8 subprogram

t Transition Ladder subprogram

(17)End of modifying
Press the [ESC] key.

Fl Save(update) h quit
F2 Quit
F3 Edit
F4 Rename, save h quit
F5 Optimize

Menus

Menu
I Editing I Result of editing I Display

Save IEnd IOptimized


Quit End Discarded -

Edit Continue Continued Not optimized

Rename End Updated Optimized

optimize Continue Optimized and continued Optimized

3-28
Z
LJJ
CL
n
a
APPENDIX 1 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

APPENDIX 1 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer),
or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).

1. For PC9801

PC980 1
On-line cable
25pin male 25pin male
connector connector

CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

2. For IBM PC/AT

IBM PC/AT

g-pin female 25pin male On-line cable


connector connector
II
25pin female 25-pin male
connector connector
IBM PC/AT cable
CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

3. For IBM PS/2

IBM PSI2

25-pin female 25-pin male On-line cable


connector connector
n
t
25-pin female 25-pin male
connector connector
IBM PS/2 cable 1
CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

Al-l
APPENDIX 1 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

0 On-line cable (AOSB-0031-K8Ol/K802)

2 2
SD SD

RD RD
4 4
RS RS
I 5 5 25-pin male
25dn male
cs I cs
connector connector

ER ER

DR DR

CD ZI E CD
7 7
SG SG
1 1
FG FG

l IBM PC/AT cable

1 8
CD CD
2 3
RD RD
3 2
SD SD
4 20
g-Din female 25-pin female
ER ER connector
connector
5 7
SG SG
6 6
DR DR
7 4
RS RS
8 5
cs cs
9 22
Cl Cl

Al-2
A!
P
b I
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING
THE PMC-UM WITH RAM

APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH


RAM

1. GENERAL

This appendix describes the procedure for operating the PMC-L using built-in RAM or the PMC-M
using the optional RAM board. It also describes related notes.

2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

(1) PMC-L
No extra hardware is needed.
The PMC-L is operated with ROM only when the PMC-L is provided with the ROM and without
the Ladder Edit Cassette (printed circuit board).

(2) PMC-M
The optional RAM board is necessary. It is also necessary to mount the Ladder Edit Cassette
or to mount ROMs for the PMC-M on the ROM sockets, OEl and OE2, on the memory board.
Mount the PMC-M ROMs on the sockets as shown below.

ROM number Socket location on the memory card


OF1 -_) OEl
OF1 + OEl

Memory card
(A16B-1212-0210)

(Note 1) When the PMC-M is provided with the ROM board, it is operated with ROM whether
the Ladder Edit Cassette is mounted or not.
(Note 2) When a ladder program is modified using the Ladder Edit Cassette on the PMC-M
provided with the ROM board, the PMC-M executes the original ladder program stored
in the ROM board, and the modified ladder program is displayed on the screen with the
DGNOS ladder diagram display function. The program being executed and the
program being displayed are different.

A2-1
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING
THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

3. RAM OPERATION

Follow the flowchart shown below to perform the RAM operation.

(1) PMC-L

Yes

Contents of the No Is the EPROM


backup RAM

Parameter for Yes


displaying the
PMC load select
screen

(Note) Ladder programs


stored in the EPROM are
copied to the RAM.

=I pk (see Section 4)

A2-2
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING
THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

(2) PMC-M

Contents of the
backup RAM
I

Yes Is the EPROM


ROM operation

No
(Note) Ladder
programs stored in
the EPROM on the
Parameter for Yes ROM board are
displaying the copied to the RAM.
PMC load select
screen

PMC LOADING
ADDRESS:OOOOH
DATA: OOH

(Note) Transferring ladder programs from the

==k I FAPT LADDER is needed. RAM contents are


deleted when the power is turned off.

RAM PMC load select


screen
i (see Section 4)

AZ-3
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING
THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

(3) Notes on RAM operation in the PMC-M


Follow the description below.

@ When a ladder oroaram sent from the FAPT LADDER is executed on RAM ooeration
Mount the ROMs for the PMC-M into the sockets usually used for the PMC-L on the
memory board. Write data into the ROM using the PMC-M management software that is
the same version as that used for transferring a ladder program. A ladder program that
only contains the END code (SUBl, SUB2, and SUB48) can be used.

When a ladder program is sent from a ROM or a floppy disk that contains a program which can
be executed, follow the description above.

8 When a ladder oroctram chanaed or created usina the Ladder Edit Cassette is executed on
RAM ooeration
Merhod 7: Mount the Edit Cassette. The PMC-M management software in the Edit
Cassette executes the ladder program.
Mefhod 2: Mount the Edit Cassette. Also mount the ROMs for the PMC-M into the
sockets usually used for the PMC-L on the memory board. The PMC-M
management software in the ROM executes the ladder program.

To change a ladder program which is executed on RAM operation, follow the description
above.

If an attempt is made to perform RAM operation in conditions other than those described
above, ROM parity alarm 604 is issued. Satisfy the above conditions first. Then perform RAM
operation.

A2-4
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING
THE PMC-UM WITH RAM

4. PMC LOAD SELECT SCREEN

The PMC load select screen shown below varies depending on hardware configuration.

When the Edit Cassette is not mounted


Item (5) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.

When the PMC-L is not provided with ROMs on the sockets;


When the PMC-M is not provided with ROMs on the sockets nor the ROM board is not
mounted on the PMC-M;
Item (2) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.

PMC LOAD SELECT


( 1) LOAD FROM I/O
(2) LOAD FROM EROM
(3) RUN
(4) RUN WITHOUT PMC
(5) EDIT LADDER
PUSH l-5 KEY :

Fig. 4

Whether the PMC load select screen is displayed or not is determined by the setting of DPCRAM,
a bit of the following CNC parameter.

NO.71 DPCRAM
I I I
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #l #O

DPCRAM 1: The PMC load select screen is not displayed.


0: The PMC load select screen is displayed.

A2-5
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

1. MAIN MENU/SETTINGS

Message Description and action to be taken

xxx executable file not found. - Executable file xxx does not exist in the system
Hit any key! directory.
- System directory is not specified in the declaration
made by environment variable PATH.

Insufficient memory. - Main memory is insufficient. Arrange setup so that


Hit any key! sufficient main memory can be acquired (500 KB or
more).

xxx process error. Hit any key! - Error occurred while loading executable file xxx.

xxx file l/O error. - I/O error for the xxx file occurred during system
setup for the type of machine being used.

Not found “I_COxxx.EXE”. - The executable file of compiler was not found.
Install the system again.

Not found “FLxxx.TBL”. - No system setup file was found.


- There is no machine type setting file that can be
used by the compiler. install the system again.

A3-1
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

2. ERRORS AT [LIST] COMMAND

Message (compilation & printer) Meaning and Dealing

MAKING DATA TABLE - Data table for target program list is making.

WRITING SELECTED FILE DATA - When source program list screen exit, writing
selected files into P INTERF.DAT.

OPEN ERROR P_INTERF.DAT - There is no P INTERF.DAT in current directory.


HIT ANY KEY...

READ ERROR P_INTERF.DAT - Reading error about P INTERF.DAT.


HIT ANY KEY...

WRITE ERROR P INTERF.DAT - Writing error about P INTERF.DAT.


HIT ANY KEY... -

NOT ENOUGH MEMORY. HIT ANY - Memory is not sufficient for source program list
KEY... screen.

FILE ALREADY SELECT. HIT ANY - The number of selected file is out of range.
KEY...

NOT BE SELECTED FILE, YET. - When any file are not selected as target file, you
can’t move the cursor to target file list screen.

NOT FOUND IN CURRENT - Specified strings is not found.


DIRECTORY. HIT ANY KEY... (Search for file name)

NOT FOUND SPECIFIED STRINGS. - Specified strings is not found.


HIT ANY KEY... (Search for PMC model)

NOT MODIFIED EXTEND, ALREADY - You can’t change the extension, when selected files
SELECTED FILES. HIT ANY KEY... are exist in select file list screen.

ABSOLUTE PATH MUST BE - Absolute path must be specified, with using


SPECIFIED. HIT ANY KEY... [DRIVE ] command.

INPUT ERROR DIRECTORY NAME. - Specified directory name is not found, with using
L-IIT ANY KEY. [DRIVE] command.

A3-2
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

3. EDITING (SOURCE PROGRAM SELECTION)

Message Description and action to be taken

Insufficient memory. - There is not sufficient main memory for loading an


executable file. An area of 500 KB or more is
required.

nsufficient disk space. - Disk space was used up during file l/O.

\lot found xxx Set-up file. - System setup file xxx does not exist in the system
directory.

\lot found xxx PMC-OS file. - Software management file xxx does not exist in the
system directory.

(xx file I/O error. - I/O error occurred for file xxx during creation of a
source program file.

llegal xxx Source-program name. - Invalid characters appear in the name, xxx, of the
input source program file.

inachine Kind And Input Program Not - Machine type for the input program and the
>onsistency! PMC series is xxx. machine type for the system (common table file) do
not agree. Perform proper system setup for the
type of machine being used.

‘lease Appoint Program Name - Neither the input program name nor the output
program name were specified when a source
program name was specified.

Output Program Already Exist! - File already exists with the name specified for the
All Right? (Y/N) output program. To overwrite this file, enter ‘3”‘.
To cancel, enter “N”.

nake New Source Program - Specified input/output program name does not
exist. A new file is being created.

‘lease Appoint Output Program Name - Specify an output program name.

Ippointed Input Program Not Exist - Names of the input program and output program do
not agree and the input program does not exist.

xx Symbol & Comment data broken. - Symbol and comment data in input program xxx
contain error(s).

A3-3
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

3.1 Ladder Diagram Editing

Message Description and action to be taken

ILLEGAL OPERATION - Only the RETURN key was pressed.


- Address data input is incorrect.
- Editing is not being performed within the limits
when creating function instructions.
- Function instructions cannot be created while the
cursor is on the right-hand side.

EDIT BUFFER OVER - Editing buffer was exceeded during net creation.

70LINE/l NET OVER - Editing cannot be continued due to the large size of
nets being edited. Make nets smaller.
LARGE NET APPEARED

256STEP/l NET OVER

MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER - Attempt was made to make a LADDER program of


more than 21,840 (24,000 when an EMS board is
used) steps.

SET COUNT OVER - Too many items in data table

INPUT INVALID - Non-numeric character(s) were specified for


[COPY], [INSLIN], ]C-UP], or [C-DOWN].
- Input address was specified in a coil.
- Data table contains invalid character(s).

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING - Relay or coil address is not specified.

RELAY OR COIL NOTHING - Relay or coil is required.

HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL - Horizontal lines in LADDER diagram are


unconnected.

VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL - Vertical lines in LADDER diagram are incorrect.

‘ARAMETER NOTHING - Function instruction parameters have not been set.

-ADDER ILLEGAL - LADDER diagram is incorrect.

ERROR NET FOUND - Incorrect net found when [COPY][MOVE] was


specified.
- Error found on the screen during a search beyond
the screen.

3ELAY OR COIL FORBIT - Unnecessary relay or coil exists.

‘LEASE COMPLETE NET - An incorrect net was found.

LLEGAL NETS CLEARED - Net which did not match the specified level of the
stack was found and deleted from the LADDER
program which was read in.

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING - Specified address was not found during address
search.

-UNCTION NOT FOUND - Specified function instruction was not found during
function instruction search.

A3-4
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Description and action to be taken

STACK REGISTER OVER (8bit) ERR - There are 9 or more continuous stacks in the
LADDER program which was read in.

NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE - There is not enough data area for the specified file.

FILE NOT READ - Disk space insufficient during writing

DISK SPACE NOTHING - Error occurred when reading data from a file.

FILE NOT WRITE - Error occurred when writing data to a file.

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. HIT ANY - Area to be used in editing could not be acquired.
KEY!

3.2 Other Editing (Applicable to Title, Message, System Parameter, Symbol


and Comment, and I/O Module Editing)

Message Description and action to be taken

File Read Error! Hit Any Key - File could not be read.

File Write Error! Hit any Key - File could not be written.

File I/O Error! Hit Any Key - File I/O error occurred.

Not Enough Space - Work area for message editing could not be
acquired due to insufficient memory.

Same Symbol Data Exist - Symbol data already exists that is identical to
symbol data that was input.

No Definition Address Appointed - Nonexistent address was specified.

Data Save Error - Error occurred when symbol or comment data was
being registered in the work area.

Not Found Data Error - Required data could not be found during symbol
data lookup.

Input Data Invalid - There is an input error in the l/O module settings.

Appointed group Not Exist - There is an error in the group that was input.

Appointed Base Not Exist - There is an error in the base that was input.

Appointed Slot Not Exist - There is an error in the slot that was input.

Appointed ID Code Not Exist - There is an error in the ID code that was input.

Input Key Not Used - Undefined key was specified.

Invalid Address Appoint - Specified address could not be found during


search.

Invalid Value - Out-of-bound value was input.


- Data other than a numeric value was input.

Operate Panel Address Error - Addresses have not been set at the operation
panel.

A3-5
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

4. PRINTER

Message Description and action to be taken

DATA INPUT ERROR - There is an error in the data input in the setup
screens such as the type selection screen for
diagram output.

NOT FIND FILE - Nonexistent file name was entered in the source
program selection screen.

DIFFERENT MACHINE CODE. - Machine type codes in the common table file and
the management file do not agree.

WRITE ERROR COMONDAT.TBL. - Error occurred when a program name was written
HIT ANY KEY... to the common table file.

NOT EXIST AMROFTRP.DAT. - AMROFTRP.DAT (print format data file) does not
HIT ANY KEY... exist.

WRITE ERROR AMROFTRP.DAT. - Error occurred when the paper size was written to
HIT ANY KEY... AMROFTRP.DAT.

DATA INVALID AMROFTRP.DAT. - Data in AMROFTRP.DAT is incorrect. Reinstall the


HIT ANY KEY... system program.

NOT ENOUGH MEMORY. - Tried to acquire memory but there was no memory
HIT ANY KEY... area of a sufficient size.

FILE READ ERROR. - There is no title file or system parameter file.


HIT ANY KEY... - Either symbol or comment file could not be found
during LADDER diagram printing or cross-reference
printing.
- Existing file could not be read in.

CHANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT. - [BREAK] key was pressed during printing.


HIT ANY KEY...

SEL SWITCH OFF - SEL button of the printer is off. Turn it on.

DATA INVALID ‘xxxxxxxX’. - Error occurred during reading of the print format
HIT ANY KEY... data file.

OPEN ERROR OUTPUT FILE. - Error occurred during opening of output file. There
HIT ANY KEY... is not sufficient space on the disk.

OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. - No output file is specified in the print format data
HIT ANY KEY... file.

OUTPUT FILE ALREADY EXIST. - File exists with the same name as the output file.
OVER WRITE (YIN) Enter “Y” to overwrite or “N” to cancel output.

WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE. - Error occurred during writing to the output file.
HIT ANY KEY... There is not sufficient space on the disk.

CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. - [BREAK] key was pressed during file output.
HIT ANY KEY...

SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA - Symbol and comment data files are invalid.
BROKEN. HIT ANY KEY...

A3-6
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

5. COMPILATION, DECOMPILATION, AND LINKING

Message Description and action to be taken

Error title 80 - Character code not permitted by PMC was found


during title compilation.

Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER). - System parameter that specifies use of the
Proceed to discompile using ‘NO’ operation panel was specified and there was an
invalid address specified in the external DI (KEY
data) address, external DO (LED) address, PMC
image address (DI), or PMC image address (DO).
This system parameter is forcibly turned off and
processing is continued (PMC-R series only).

Error message 60 - Size of a message exceeded the maximum size for


the system.

Error message 61 - Character code not permitted by PMC was found


during message compilation.

Error symbol/comment 70 - During compilation, the size of a symbol or


comment exceeded the maximum size for the
system.

Error symbol/comment 71 - During compilation, when the message area was


extended, symbol and comment data overflowed
the permitted ROM size.

Error symbol/comment 72 - Character code not permitted by PMC was found


during symbol compilation.

Error symbol/comment 73 - Character code not permitted by PMC was found


during comment compilation.

Error ladder 40 - During LADDER compilation, the size of the


Error end 2 LADDER program exceeded the maximum size for
the system.

Error ladder 41 - During LADDER compilation, when the symbol and


comment area was extended, the LADDER program
overflowed the permitted ROM size.

Error ladder 42 - Invalid intermediate LADDER code was found


Error end 2 during LADDER compilation.
- Invalid LADDER object was found during LADDER
decompilation.

Error ladder 48 - There is an invalid intermediate code in the


intermediate code file.

Error end 25 - There are no intermediate codes for the LADDER.


- There is no #LA file.

Error end 3 - Number of partition codes exceeded 99.

Error end 4 - Execution time for the first level ladder exceeds the
PMC default value or the time set in the system
parameter.

A3-7
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Description and action to be taken

Error end 17 - END2 was found before END1 or END1 was not
found before the LADDER program ended.

Error end 18 - END3 was found before END2 or END2 was not
found before the LADDER program ended.

Error end 19 - END3 was not found before the LADDER program
ended.
(Does not include third level ommission mode.)

Error end 20 - There is more than one ENDl.

Error end 21 - There is more than one END2.

Error end 24 - There is LADDER program code following END3

Error end 5 - END1 exists in common control mode.

Error end 6 - END2 exists in common control mode.

Error end 7 - END3 exists in common control mode.

Error end 11 - END1 exists in jump control mode.

Error end 12 - END2 exists in jump control mode.

Error end 13 - END3 exists in jump control mode.

Error end 8 - COM exists in common control mode.

Error end 9 - COME exists in common control mode in which the


number of coils is specified.

Error end 10 - COME exists outside of common control mode.

Error end 14 - JMP exists in jump control mode.

Error end 15 - JMPE exists in jump control mode in which the


number of coils is specified.

Error end 16 - JMPE exists outside of jump control mode.

Error end 27 - WRT or WRT.NOT does not exist following a


function instruction that requires WRT or
WRT.NOT.

Uarning end 29 - Number of coils was specified in a machine type for


which the number of JMP coils cannot be specified.
The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE
specification mode) and processing is continued.

Narning end 30 - Number of coils was specified in a machine type for


which the number of COM coils cannot be
specified. The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE
specification mode) and processing is continued.

A3-8
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Description and action to be taken

Error link 90 - During linking, SO record was not found before the
end of the load module.
- Different S record exists before the SO record.

Error link 92 - During linking, the value for the record length area
in the S2 record was less than 4.
- S record other than SO, S2, S8, or S9 was found.
- No S8 or S9 record was found before the end of
the load module.

irror link 93 - During linking, an attempt was made to load a load


module into an area other than the specified
address area.

\lot appoint source program name - No source program was specified for compilation or
decompilation.

riot appoint ROM format file name - ROM format file name was not specified for
compilation, decompilation or linking.

Jot appoint load module file name - No load module file name was specified for linking.

Iut of memory - Work area required for processing cannot be


acquired. This occurs because a device driver
which requires a large amount of memory is
resident, because data is too large, or for some
similar reason.

Jot enough space - Not enough space is available on disk for file
creation during compilation, decompilation or
linking.

:ile already exist - Name specified for ROM format file during
?enewal (Y/N)? compilation already exists.

‘rogram already exist - #CN file of the source program specified for
?enewal (Y/N)? decompilation already exists.

qead error - #CN or #PA file of the source program specified for
compilation does not exist.
- Some sort of disk l/O error occurred.

Iead error - ROM format file specified for decompilation or


linking does not exist.
- Machine type of the ROM format file specified for
decompilation differs from the machine type
specified in the machine type setting.
- Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

lead error - Load module file specified for linking does not exist.
- Some sort of disk l/O error occurred.

Vrite error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

Vrite error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

A3-9
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Description and action to be taken

(System parameter) Read error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.
(Note) When no #PA file exists for the specified
source program, the following message is displayed.
“Cannot read source program j-l-j-\.”

(Title) Read error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.


(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no
#TA file exists for the specified source program.

(I/O module) Read error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.
(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no
#IO file exists for the specified source program.

(Message) Read error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.


(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no
#ME file exists for the specified source program.

Symbol) Read error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.


(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no
#SY file exists for the specified source program.

Comment) Read error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.


(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no
#Cl file exists for the specified source program.

:Ladder) Read error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.


(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no
#LA file exists for the specified source program.

‘System parameter) Write error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

:Title) Write error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

‘I/O module) Write error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

Message) Write error - Some sort of disk t/O error occurred.

Symbol) Write error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

Comment) Write error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

Ladder) Write error - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

EXECUTING - Time-consuming processing is being performed


during compilation, decompilation, or linking.
(Note) This is not an error message.

A3-10
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

6. COMPILE ERRORS

Compile errors can be divided into the following two basic groups:

- Error:Processing is stopped because of a fatal error. The processing can not be continued
unless the cause of the error has been removed.

- Warning: Processing of a subprogram for which a warning is output is stopped.


The processing of other subprograms is continued.

6.1 Path O/warning

001 - Editing sub-program has not completed ( Pn )


(Cause) The editing of a subprogram (Pn.$SJ) has not been completed.

002 - Multiple sub-program with same number exist ( Pn )


(Cause) A ladder program and step sequence program have identical numbers.

003 . The title data which could not be display on the CNC was replaced with space code
(Cause) The title data contains a code which cannot be processed (a Japanese code,
for example).

004 * Illegal OP.PANEL( PARAMETER ). Proceed to discompile using ‘NO’.


(Cause) Although the system parameter for the use of the FO machine operator’spanel
is set to YES, the DI/DO address data is not specified.

6.2 Path O/error/password

005 * Verification error.


(Cause) The password is invalid.

006 * This word can not be used as password.Try another word.


(Cause) The entered password is not valid.
(Action) Enter another password.

007 * Only alphabetical and numerical characters are allowed.


(Cause) A non-alphanumeric character is specified.

6.3 Path O/error/others

008 - Not appoint source program.


(Cause) No source program name is specified.

009 * Not appoint ROM format file name.


(Cause) No ROM file name is specified.

A3-11
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

010 - Not enough disk space.


(Cause) There is insufficient free space on the disk.

011 - Out of memory.


(Cause) There is insufficient free space in memory.

012 * xxx Source-Program name illegal.


(Cause) The source program name is invalid.

013 - xxx file not found.


(Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

014 * xxx read error.


(Cause) The source program may have been damaged or destroyed.

015 * xxx write error.


(Cause) A write error occurred, the cause is not known.

016 -xxx file already exist.


(Cause) A ROM file having the same name exists. (warning)

017 * xxx Source-program not found.


(Cause) The xxx source program cannot be found.

018 - xxx(System parameter) read error.


(Cause) The system parameter data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

019 * xxx(Title) read error.


(Cause) The title data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

020 * xxx(V0 module) read error.


(Cause) The I/O module data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

6.4 Path l/warning

001 - Not found Sub-program.


(Cause) An empty file was compiled.

002 * Sub-program number is different from Source-program.


(Cause) The specified program number does not agree with a stored programnumber.

003 * There is no ‘SP’ instruction at the head of the subprogram.


(Cause) The specified subprogram does not begin with the SP instruction.
Alternatively, the data of the specified file has been damaged or destroyed.

A3-12
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

004 * ‘SP’ instruction was detected in the subprogram.


(Cause) Data was already present before SP instruction.

005 * There is no ‘SPE’ instruction at the bottom of the subprogram.


(Cause) Data remained after SPE instruction.

006 - There is an undefined instruction.


(Cause) A code of other than a step sequence instruction is stored.

007 * Specified value for a parameter of the xxxx instruction is outside the range.
(Cause) The parameter of the xxxx instruction falls outside the predetermined range.

008 * An illegal program number is specified for the xxxx instruction.


(Cause) The program number specified for the xxxx instruction falls outside the
predetermined range.

009 - An illegal label number is specifed for the xxxx instruction.


(Cause) The label number specified for the xxxx instruction falls outside the
predetermined range.

010 - The label of xxxx is used twice or more.


(Cause) A label number is duplicated within a single subprogram.

011 * The number of label exceeds the limit.


(Cause) An attempt was made to exceed the maximum number of labels that can be
defined in a single subprogram.

012 * Illegal ‘DSTEP’ instruction was detected,


(Cause) The DLBL instruction is not defined. Alternatively, the definition of the DSTEP
instruction is duplicated.

013 * LADDER execution time at the 1st level is too large.


(Cause) The overall execution time of the first level exceeds the predetermined limit.
(Action) Reduce the size of the program of the first level.

014 * The coil number specification of JMP instruction is not allowed. .


(Cause) The parameter of the JMP instruction (number of coils to be jumped) is other
than 0.
(Action) Specify 0 for the parameter.

015 - The coil number specification of COM instruction is not allowed.


(Cause) The parameter of the COM instruction (number of coils to be controlled) is
other than 0.
(Action) Specify 0 for the parameter.

A3-13
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

016 * There is no LADDER program.


(Cause) The level 3/subprogram is empty.
(Action) Add an END3 or SPSPE instruction.

017 - The symbol data which could not be displayed on the CNC was replaced with space
code.
(Cause) The symbol contains a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

018 - The comment data which could not be displayed on the CNC was replaced with space
code.
(Cause) The comment contains a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

019 * The message data which could not be displayed on the CNC was replaced with space
code.
(Cause) The message contains a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

6.5 Path l/error

020 * Not found ‘FLCOMMON.MSG’ file.


(Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

021 - Not found ‘FLCOSTEP.MSG’ file.


(Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

022 - Not found ‘FLxxxxx.TBL’ Set-up file.


(Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

023 * ‘FLxxxxx.TBL’ Set-up file broken.


(Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

024 * Insufficient disk space.


(Cause) There is insufficient free space on the disk, preventing data from being output
to the file.
(Action) Delete any unnecessary data from the disk. ’

025 * LADDER program exists beyond END instruction.


(Cause) A program is specified after the END instruction.

026 * The number of label exceeds the limit.


(Cause) The number of labels used exceeds the limit (up to 256 for each
level/subprogram).

027 - There is no label of Lxxxx.


(Cause) The jump destination label for the JMPB instruction is not defined.
(Action) Define the label with the LBL instruction.

A3-14
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

028 - The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more.


(Cause) The definition of the label is duplicated.

029 * There is no END1 instruction.


(Cause) A program of level 1 does not end with an END1 instruction.

030 * There is no END2 instruction.


(Cause) A program of level 2 does not end with an END2 instruction.

031 - There is no END3 instruction.


(Cause) A program of level 3 does not end with an END3 instruction.

032 * There is no LADDER program.


(Cause) The program of level 1 or 2 is empty.

033 * There is no SP instruction at the head of the program.


(Cause) The first instruction of a subprogram is not SP.

034 . Illegal SPE instruction was detected.


(Cause) The SPE instruction is not preceded by the SP instruction.

035 - LADDER program exists beyond END1 instruction.


(Cause) Within level 1, a program is specified after the END1 instruction.

036 - LADDER program exists beyond END2 instruction.


(Cause) Within level 2, a program is specified after the END2 instruction.

037 * LADDER program exists beyond SPE instruction.


(Cause) In a subprogram, a program is specified after the SPE instruction.

038 * END1 instruction cannot be used excluding the 1st level.


(Cause) The use of the END1 instruction was attempted within level 2 or 3.

039 . END2 instruction cannot be used excluding the 2nd level.


(Cause) The use of the END2 instruction was attempted within level 1 or 3.

040 * END3 instruction cannot be used excluding the 3rd level.


(Cause) The use of the END3 instruction was attempted within level 1 or 2.

041 * END instruction cannot be used.


(Cause) The use of the END instruction was attempted within level 1.

042 * Program number is different from program name.


(Cause) The subprogram file number does not agree with the number specified in the
parameter of the SP instruction.

A3-15
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

043 - The size of LADDER program is too large.


(Cause) The object size of the ladder program exceeds the predetermined limit.
(Action) Reduce the size of the ladder program.

044 * The range controled by COM instruction is beyond END1 instruction.


(Cause) An END1 instruction was encountered before the COME instruction.

045 * The range controled by COM instruction is beyond END2 instruction.


(Cause) An END2 instruction was encountered before the COME instruction.

046 * The range controled by COM instruction is beyond END3 instruction.


(Cause) An END3 instruction was encountered before the COME instruction.

047 - COM instruction was detected in the COM mode.


(Cause) A COM instruction was encountered before the COME instruction.
(Action) Terminate control with the COME instruction, then restart control with the
COM instruction.

048 - Illegal COME instruction was detected.


(Cause) The COM instruction cannot be found before the COME instruction.

049 * The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END1 instruction.


(Cause) An END1 instruction was encountered before the JMPE instruction.

050 . The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END2 instruction.


(Cause) An END2 instruction was encountered before the JMPE instruction.

051 - The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END3 instruction.


(Cause) An END3 instruction was encountered before the JMPE instruction.

052 * JMP instruction was detected in the JMP mode.


(Cause) A JMP instruction was encountered before the JMPE instruction.
(Action) Terminate control with the JMPE instruction, then restart control with the JMP
instruction.

053 * Illegal JMPE instruction was detected.


(Cause) The JMP instruction cannot be found before the JMPE instruction.

054 - LADDER program exists beyond END3 instruction.


(Cause) Within level 3, a program is specified after the END3 instruction.

055 * LADDER program is broken.


(Cause) No instructions can be recoonized.

A3-16
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

056 * There is no coil in the functional instruction which needs the coil.
(Cause) No output instruction is specified after a functional instruction which requires
output.

057 * SP instruction can not be used in the main program.


(Cause) The use of the SP instruction was attempted within the main program.

058 . SPE instruction can not be used in the main program.


(Cause) The use of the SPE instruction was attempted within the main program.

059 * END1 instruction can not be used in the subprogram.


(Cause) The use of the END1 instruction was attempted within a subprogram.

060 * END2 instruction can not be used in the subprogram.


(Cause) The use of the END2 instruction was attempted within a subprogram.

061 - END3 instruction can not be used in the subprogram.


(Cause) The use of the END3 instruction was attempted within a subprogram.

062 * Specified value for a parameter of the functional instruction is outside the range.
(Cause) An illegal value has been specified for the parameter of a functional
instruction.

063 * An illegal program number is specified for the CALL instruction.


(Cause) A non-P address has been specified for the parameter of the CALL
instruction.

064 ’ An illegal program number is specified for the CALLU instruction.


(Cause) A non-P address has been specified for the parameter of the CALLU
instruction.

065 . An illegal program number is specified for the SP instruction.


(Cause) A non-P address has been specified for the parameter of the SP instruction.

066 . There is an undefined instruction.


(Cause) An attempt was made to use a basic or functional instruction which is not
supported by the selected model.

067 * There is no SPE instruction at the bottom of the subprogram.


(Cause) A subprogram does not end with the SPE instruction.

068 * SP instruction was detected in the subprogram.


(Cause) An SP instruction was encountered before an SPE instruction.

069 * The range controled by COM instruction is beyond SPE instruction.


(Cause) An SPE instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

A3-17
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

070 * The destination of JMP instruction is beyond SPE instruction.


(Cause) An SPE instruction was encountered before a JMPE instruction.

071 * CALL instruction cannot be used excluding the 2nd level.


(Cause) The use of the CALL instruction was attempted within level 1 or 3.

072 * CALLU instruction cannot be used excluding the 2nd level.


(Cause) The use of the CALLU instruction was attempted within level 1 or 3.

073 . The range controled by COM instruction is beyond END instruction.


(Cause) An END instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

074 - The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END instruction.


(Cause) An END instruction was encountered before a JMPE instruction.

075 * The range controled by COM instruction is beyond SP instruction.


(Cause) An SP instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

076 * The destination of JMP instruction is beyond SP instruction.


(Cause) An SP instruction was encountered before a JMPE instruction.

077 - The range controled by COM instruction is beyond CALL instruction.


(Cause) A CALL instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

078 . The range controled by COM instruction is beyond CALLU instruction.


(Cause) A CALLU instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

079 - The destination of JMPB instruction is beyond COM instruction.


(Cause) An attempt was made to execute the JMPB instruction from the outside to the
inside, or from the inside to the outside, of common line control.

080 * JMPC instruction cannot be used in the main program.


(Cause) The use of the JMPC instruction was attempted within the main program.

081 . An illegal label number is specified for the JMPB instruction.


(Cause) A non-L address has been specified as the parameter of the JMPB
instruction.

082 * An illegal label number is specified for the LBL instruction.


(Cause) A non-L address has been specified as the parameter of the LBL instruction.

083 - An illegal label number is specified for the JMPC instruction.


(Cause) A non-L address has been specified as the parameter of the JMPC
instruction.

A3-18
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

6.6Path 2/warning

001 * Unreferenced subprogram Pxxxx.


(Cause) A subprogram which is not called by a CALL or CALLU instruction is
encountered.

6.7 Path 2/error

002 * Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment )


(Cause) The total size of the message, symbol, and comment data exceeds the
predetermined limit.

003 * Data too large. ( ladder + step sequence )


(Cause) The total size of the ladder and step sequence data exceeds the
predetermined limit.

004 - Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment + ladder + step sequence )
(Cause) The total size of the message, symbol, comment, ladder, and step sequence
data exceeds the predetermined limit.

005 * The number of label exceeds the limit. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )
(Cause) The total number of labels used within LEVELl, LEVEL2, or LEVEL3 exceeds
the predetermined limit.

006 * The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )
(Cause) An identical L address is specified for two or more labels in LEVELl, LEVEL2,
or LEVELB.

007 * Program exists beyond END inctruction. ( Pxxx.#LA )


(Cause) A program including an END instruction is followed by another program.

008 - There is no label of Lxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )


(Cause) The destination label of JMPC cannot be found in LEVEL2.#LA.

009 * The label of Lxxxx exists in the COM mode. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA )
(Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found between COM and COME.

010 - The label of Lxxxx to refer exists in another level. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA )
(Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found in LEVELl.#LA or LEVEL3.#LA.

011 - There is no subprogram Pxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )


(Cause) The subprogram to be called by CALL or CALLU cannot be found or is empty.

A3-19
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

7. INPUT AND OUTPUT

Message Description and action to be taken

INVALID RECEIVE DATA - Data other than IS0 codes was sent.

TIME OUT ERROR - During reception processing, a command was sent


from the PC, but there was no response within a
certain period of time. Confirm for the receiving
side that the power is on, settings are correct,
cables are properly connected, parameters (baud
rate and stop bits) are correct, and that
CONFIG.SYS is correct.

‘xxxx.DAT’ file format error. - No xxx.DAT files exist in the directory containing
4it any key FAPT LADDER. Install the system again.

VOT EXIST APPOINT ROM FORM - Specified ROM format file does not exist on the
=lLE disk [write and verification for the ROM writer,
download and comparison for the PMC].

ALREADY EXIST FILE! - Specified file already exists [read operation for the
3JPERSCRlPTlON REAL FILE? (Y/N) ROM writer, upload for the PMC]. To overwrite,
enter “Y”. To change the name of the file, enter
“N”.

3OW PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT - There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified
-ILE ROM format file [write operation for the ROM
writer].

3OM PARITY WARNING OF - There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified
4PPOINT FILE. CONTINUE TO ROM format file [download for the PMC]. To
TRANSFER? (Y/N) download in this state, enter “Y”. To cancel, enter
“N”.

3OM PARITY WARNING OF - There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified
APPOINT FILE ROM format file [read operation for the ROM writer,
upload for the PMC).

NAITING FOR RECEIVE. WHEN TO - No data was received during transmission [read
STOP. PUSH BREAK KEY operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC].
Press the break key to interrupt processing, then
check cable connections and the power supply, etc.
of the sending side.

NITIALIZE EXECUTE - Work file is being created during upload from PMC
(PMC-N).
- Checking ROM data parity [write operation for the
ROM writer, download for the PMCJ. Wait while
processing is performed.

4OM ID UNMATCH ERROR - Inserted cassette or module is incorrect for the


present machine type (PMC-N, 431.

:ILE OPEN ERROR - Cannot open specified ROM format file.

:ILE CLOSE ERROR - Cannot close specified ROM format file.

‘ILE WRITE ERROR - Cannot write to specified ROM format file.

A3-20
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Description and action to be taken

IFILE READ ERROR I- Cannot read from specified ROM format file.

I-
ROM FILE > ROM ERROR - During writing, the specified ROM format file could
not be fully written to ROM (cassette or module).

IROM I-
r
FILE FORMAT ERROR ROM file format is incorrect.

WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR - There is not enough space on the disk for the work
file area (512K bytes) [PMC-N].

ROM SET ERROR - EROM is installed with incorrect orientation.

EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR - EROM is faulty.

IWIIT.5
- Cannot write to EROM because it has not yet been
erased.

- EROM has not yet been erased.

DATA SEND ERROR - The number of the sent data items does not match
that of the received data items.

PARITY ERROR - A parity error occurred during data transfer.

RUNNING WRITER! ERROR - The ROM writer is being used.

ROW TYPE ERROR - Incorrect type of ROM

PORT ERROR (OVER RUN) - Overrun (determined by the status check


information from I/O ports)

PORT ERROR (PARITY) - Parity error (determined by the status check


information from I/O ports)

I
PORT ERROR (FRAMING) - Framing error (determined by the status check
information from I/O ports)

I
PORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT) - Break interrupt error (determined by the status
check information from I/O ports)

- Time-out error (determined by the status check


information from I/O ports)

- Data transfer error (determined by the status check


information from l/O ports)

~
TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR - The system timer malfunctions. Update the text file
(FL10 AT.DAT) information. For details, see the
comments of the file.

A3-21
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

8. MNEMONIC EDITING

8.1 Mnemonic Editing (System Parameters >

Message Description and action to be taken

Invalid qualifier. - System parameter is followed by invalid


character(s).

Unknown data number. - Data number was specified that does not exist in
the system parameters.

Illegal value. - System parameter contains invalid numerical data.

Out of value. - System parameter contains out-of-bound numerical


data.

Expected a multiple of 5. - System parameter required to be a multiple of 5 is


not a multiple of 5.

Expected a multiple of 2. - System parameter required to be a multiple of 2 is


not a multiple of 2.

Illegal character(s). - System parameter contains invalid character(s).

Data not found. - There is no system parameter data.

Too many characters in 1 line. - System parameter contains a line of data that
exceeds the maximum allowed number of
characters.

Illegal data number. - System parameter contains invalid data number(s).

Too long strings. - System parameter contains character data that


exceeds the maximum length.

Illegal address - System parameter contains an invalid address.

Expected parameter(s) - System parameter is missing or incomplete.

Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER) - As OP.PANEL (parameter) of the system


Proceed to discompile using ‘NO’. parameters is invalid, it is assumed to be “NO”
and operation continues.

A3-22
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

8.2 Mnemonic Editing <Title Data B

Message Description and action to be taken

Invalid qualifier. - Title data is followed by invalid character(s).

Unknown data number. - Specified data identifier number does not exist.

Too long strings. - Length of title data exceeded the maximum length.

Include KANA or KANJI character(s). - Title data contains m-type characters.

Illegal character(s) - Title data contains invalid character data.

Data not found. - There is no title data.

Too many characters in 1 line. - Title data contains a line of data that exceeds the
maximum allowed number of characters.

Illegal title number. - Data identifier number specified is incorrect.

8.3 Mnemonic Editing (Symbol and Comment Data >

Message Description and action to be taken

SYMBOL data not found. - Comment data exists, but there is no symbol data.

Invalid qualifier. - Symbol and comment data is followed by invalid


character(s).

Illegal character(s). - Invalid character data was specified in symbol and


comment data.

Illegal address. - Invalid address was specified in symbol and


comment data.

Redefinition of address data. - Symbol and comment data contain identical


address data.

Redefinition of symbol data. - Mnemonic symbol data contains identical symbol


data.

Include KANA or KANJI character(s) in - Comment data which contains m-type characters
comment data. was converted without the m-type character
conversion option (J option).

Data not found. - There is no symbol or comment data.

Too long characters in 1 line. - Symbol or comment data contains a line of data
that exceeds the maximum allowed number of
characters.

Comment data not found. - Only symbol data was converted for the address.

Symbol or comment data not found. - Only symbol or comment data was converted for
the address.

Out of address limits. - Mnemonic data contains an address that is out of


bounds.

A3-23
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

8.4 Mnemonic Editing (LADDER Data >

Message Description and action to be taken

Expected address. - Basic command has no address.

invalid qualifier. - LADDER data is followed by invalid character(s).

Expected parameter(s). - Function instruction has no parameters.

Not enough parameter(s). - Function instruction is missing parameters.

Too many parameters. - Function instruction has too many parameters.

Illegal address. - Unspecifiable address was specified.

Out of address limits. - Ou